THANK YOU
Thank you for choosing this KENWOOD TS-2000(X)/TS-B2000 transceiver.
It has been developed by a
team of engineers determined to continue the tradition of
excellence and innovation in KENWOOD
transceivers. This transceiver features dual Digital Signal
Processing (DSP) units to process
IF and AF signals. By taking maximum advantage of DSP technology,
the TS-2000(X)/TS-B2000
gives you enhanced interference reduction capabilities and
improves the quality of audio that
you transmit without installing additional analog filters.
You will notice the differences when
you fight QRM and QRN. As you learn how to use this transceiver,
you will also find that KENWOOD
is pursuing "user friendliness". For example, each
time you change the Menu No. in Menu mode,
you will see scrolling messages on the display that tell you
what you are selecting. Though user
friendly, this transceiver is technically sophisticated and
some features may be new to you.
Consider this manual to be a personal tutorial from the designers.
Allow the manual to guide you
through the learning process now, then act as a reference
in the coming years.
FEATURES
- All mode operation from HF to 1.2 GHz (TS-2000/TS-B2000
Optional) amateur radio band with DSP
functions.
- Dual high speed Digital Signal Processing (DSP) units.
- Adjustable DSP filter frequencies.
- High speed Digital Automatic Gain Control (AGC).
- A second independent sub-receiver for the 144 MHz and 430
(440) MHz bands (FM and AM mode only).
- A built-in Antenna Tuner for HF/50 MHz band.
- A built-in 9600/1200 bps TNC for DX Packet Cluster Tune
(EC.T.) and Sky Command I1+ operations.
- DX Packet Cluster Tune (EC.T.) for DX hunting.
- Instant Satellite communication key.
- A razor sharp DSP filter up to 50 Hz for CW operation.
SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES
After carefully unpacking the transceiver, identify the items
listed in the table. We recommend you keep
the box and packing material below in case you need to repack
the transceiver in the future.
1) Microphone
2) T91-0352-XX
3) DC power cable E30-3157-XX
4) 7-pin DIN plug E07-0751-XX
5) 8-pin DIN plug E07-0851-XX
6) 13-pin DIN plug E07-1351-XX
7) Fuse (25A) F05-2531-XX
8) Fuse (4A) F06-4027-XX
9) Screw Set N99-2024-XX
10) Spacer for MB-430 G11-2698-XX (4of TS-2000/TS-2000X) (4
of TS-B2000)
11) Line filter (E & E2-type only) L79-1408-XX
12) Retaining Band (E & E2 type only) J61-0307-XX
13) CD-ROM T93-0123-XX
14) Instruction Manual B62-1221-XX
15) Schematic/Block Diagrams B52-0616-XX
16) B52-0614-XX
17) B52-0617-XX
18) B52-0618-XX
19) Warranty card B46-0469-XX (K-type)
20) B46-0310-XX (All E-types)
WRITING CONVENTIONS FOLLOWED
The writing conventions described below have been followed
to simplify instructions and avoid
unnecessary repetition.
Instruction: Press [KEY]. What to do: Press & release
KEY.
Instruction: Press [KEY1]+[KET2]. What to do: Press &
hold KEY1 down, then press KEY2.
If there are more than two keys, press and hold down each
key in turn
until the final key has been pressed.
Instruction: Press [KEY1], [KEY2]. What to do: Press KEY1
momentarily, release
KEY1, then press KEY2.
Instruction: Press [KEY]+power button. What to do: Withe
the transceiver power
OFF, press and hold KEY, then switch ON the transceiver power
by pressing power key.
MODELS COVERED BY THIS MANUAL
The models listed below are covered by this manual.
1) TS-2000: HF/VHF/UHF All-mode Multi-band Transceiver
2) TS-2000X: HF/VHF/UHF/1.2 GHz All-mode Multi-band Transceiver
3) TS-B2000: HF/VHF/UHF All-mode Multi-band Transceiver
As for TS-B2000, refer to the on-line help for information
on how to operate and control the
transceiver. Refer to pages 2, 3, and 13 for the installation
and information on the connectors.
MARKET CODES
K-type: The Americas
E-type: Europe
E2-type: Spain
The market code is shown on the carton box. Refer to the
specifications {page 105} for the
information on available operating frequencies.
NOTICE TO THE USER
One or more of the following statements may be applicable
for this equipment.
FCC WARNING
This equipment generates or uses radio frequency energy.
Changes or modifications to this equipment
may cause harmful interference unless the modifications are
expressly approved in the instruction manual.
The user could lose the authority to operate this equipment
ff an unauthorized change or
modification is made.
INFORMATION TO THE DIGITAL DEVICE USER REQUIRED BY THE FCC
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the
limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed
to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference in a residential installation.
This equipment generates, uses and can generate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and
used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that the interference will
not occur in a particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio
or television reception, which can be
determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is
encouraged to try to correct
the interference by one or more of the following measures:
- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
- Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
- Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different
from that to which the receiver is connected.
- Consult the dealer for technical assistance.
Please observe the following precautions to prevent fire,
personal injury, and transceiver damage:
- Connect the transceiver only to a power source described
in this manual or as marked on the
transceiver itself.
- Route all power cables safely. Ensure the power cables can
neither be stepped upon nor pinched
by items placed near or against the cables. Pay particular
attention to locations near AC
receptacles, AC outlet strips, and points of entry to the
transceiver.
- Take care not to drop objects or spill liquid into the transceiver
through enclosure openings. Metal
objects, such as hairpins or needles, inserted into the transceiver
may contact voltages resulting in
serious electrical shocks. Never permit children to insert
any objects into the transceiver.
- Do not attempt to defeat methods used for grounding and
electrical polarization in the
transceiver, particularly involving the power input cable.
- Adequately ground all outdoor antennas for this transceiver
using approved methods. Grounding
helps protect against voltage surges caused by lightning.
It also reduces the chance of a build-up
of static charge.
- Locate the transceiver away from heat sources such as a
radiator, stove, amplifier or other
devices that produce substantial amounts of heat.
- Do not use volatile solvents such as alcohol, paint thinner,
gasoline or benzene to clean the cabinet
of the transceiver. Use a clean cloth with warm water or a
mild detergent.
- Disconnect the input power cable from the power source when
the transceiver is not used for long
periods of time.
- Remove the transceiver's enclosure only to do accessory
installations described in this manual or
accessory manuals. Follow provided instructions carefully,
to avoid electrical shocks. If unfamiliar
with this type of work, seek assistance from an experienced
individual, or have a professional
technician do the task.
- Minimum recommended distance for an outdoor antenna from
power lines is one and one-half
times the vertical height of the associated antenna support
structure. This distance allows adequate
clearance from the power lines if the support structure fails
for any reason.
- Locate the transceiver so as not to interfere with its ventilation.
Do not place books or other
equipment on the transceiver that may impede the free movement
of air. Allow a minimum of
4 inches (10 cm) between the rear of the transceiver and the
wall or operating desk shelf.
- Do not use the transceiver near water or sources of moisture.
For example, avoid use near a
bathtub, sink, swimming pool, or in a damp basement or attic.
- The presence of an unusual odor or smoke is often a sign
of trouble. Immediately turn the
power OFF and remove the power cable. Contact a KENWOOD service
station or your dealer for
advice.
- Enlist the services of qualified personnel in the following
cases:
a) The power supply or plug is damaged.
b) Objects have fallen or liquid has spilled into the transceiver.
c) The transceiver has been exposed to rain.
d) The transceiver is operating abnormally or performance
has seriously degraded.
e) The transceiver has been dropped or the enclosure damaged.
CONTENTS
I THANK YOU
FEATURES
SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES
WRITING CONVENTIONS FOLLOWED
II MODELS COVERED BY THIS MANUAL
MARKET CODES
NOTICE TO USER
III PRECAUTIONS
IV CONTENTS
Chapter 1 INSTALLATION
ANTENNA CONNECTION 1
GROUND CONNECTION 1
LIGHTNING PROTECTION 1
DC POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION 2
UTILIZING THE BAIL (TS-2000 (X)ONLY) 2
REPLACING FUSES 2
ACCESSORY CONNECTIONS 3
FRONT PANEL 3
Headphones (PHONES) 3
Microphone (MIC) 3
REAR PANEL 3
External Speakers (EXT. SP1/EXT. SP2) 3
Keys for CW (PADDLE and KEY) 3
Chapter 2 Your first QSO (HF/50MHz band)
RECEIVING 4
TRANSMITTING 5
Chapter 3 YOUR FIRST QSO (VHF/UHF band)
RECEIVING 6
TRANSMITTING 7
Chapter 4 Getting ACQUAINTED
FRONT PANEL 8
REAR PANEL 13
DISPLAY 14
MICROPHONE 17
Chapter 5 OPERATING BASICS
SWITCHING POWER ON/OFF 18
ADJUSTING VOLUME 18
AUDIO FREQUENCY (AF) GAIN 18
RADIO FREQUENCY (RF) GAIN 18
SELECTING VFO A OR VFO B 18
SELECTING A BAND 18
SELECTING A MODE 19
ADJUSTING SQUELCH 19
SELECTING A FREQUENCY 19
FRONT PANEL METER 19
TRANSMITTING 20
SELECTING TRANSMIT POWER 20
MICROPHONE GAIN 20
Chapter 6 MENU SETUP
WHAT IS A MENU? 21
MENU A/MENU B 21
MENU ACCESS 21
QUICK MENU 21
PROGRAMMING THE QUICK MENU 21
USING THE QUICK MENU 21
MENU CONFIGURATION 22
ALPHABETICAL FUNCTION LIST 26
Chapter 7 BASIC COMMUNICATIONS
SSB TRANSMISSION 28
FM TRANSMISSION 28
AM TRANSMISSION 29
NARROW BANDWIDTH FOR FM 29
NARROW BANDWIDTH FOR AM 29
CW TRANSMISSION 30
AUTO ZERO-BEAT 30
TX SIDETONE/RX PITCH FREQUENCY 30
Chapter 8 ENHANCED COMMUNICATIONS
SPLIT-FREQUENCY OPERATION 31
TF-SET (TRANSMIT FREQUENCY SET) 31
FM REPEATER OPERATION 32
PROGRAMMING AN OFFSET 32
Selecting an Offset Direction 32
Selecting an Offset Frequency 32
TRANSMITTING A TONE 33
Activating the Tone Function 33
Selecting a Tone Frequency 33
Selecting Continuous or Burst 33
Transmitting a 1750 Hz Tone 33
AUTOMATIC REPEATER OFFSET 34
REVERSE FUNCTION 34
AUTOMATIC SIMPLEX CHECK (ASC) 34
TONE FREQ. ID SCAN 34
FM CTCSS OPERATION 35
CTCSS FREQ. ID SCAN 35
FM DCS OPERATION 36
DCS CODE 'D SCAN 36
Chapter 9 COMMUNICATING AIDS
RECEIVING 37
SELECTING YOUR FREQUENCY 37
Direct Frequency Entry 37
Using 1 MHz Steps 37
Quick QSY 37
Fine Tuning 38
Equalizing VFO Frequencies (A=B) 38
RIT (RECEIVE INCREMENTAL TUNING) 38
AGC (AUTOMATIC GAIN CONTROL) 38
TRANSMITTING 39
VOX (VOICE-OPERATED TRANSMIT) 39
Microphone Input Level 39
Delay Time 39
SPEECH PROCESSOR 40
XlT (TRANSMIT INCREMENTAL TUNING) 40
CUSTOMIZING TRANSMIT SIGNAL
CHARACTERISTICS 41
TX Filter Bandwidth (SSB/AM) 41
TX Equalizer (SSB/FM/AM) 41
TRANSMIT INHIBIT 41
CHANGING FREQUENCY WHILE
TRANSMITTING 41
CW BREAK-IN 42
USING SEMI BREAK-IN OR
FULL BREAK-IN 42
ELECTRONIC KEYER 42
CHANGING KEYING SPEED 42
AUTO WEIGHTING 42
Reverse Keying Weight Ratio 42
BUG KEY FUNCTION 43
CW MESSAGE MEMORY 43
Storing CW Messages 43
Checking CW Messages without
Transmitting 43
Transmitting CW Messages 43
Changing the Inter-message Interval Time 44
Changing the Sidetone Volume 44
Inset Keying 44
FREQUENCY CORRECTION FOR CW 44
AUTO CW TX IN SSB MODE 44
Chapter 10 SUB-RECEIVER
SUB-RECEIVER 45
TX BAND AND CONTROL BAND 45
TX BAND 45
CONTROL BAND 45
RECEIVING 45
ACTIVATING THE SUB-RECEIVER 45
CONTROLLING THE SUB-RECEIVER 45
SELECTING A BAND 45
ADJUSTING THE AUDIO FREQUENCY (AF) GAIN 46
ADJUSTING THE SQUELCH 46
SELECTING A FREQUENCY 46
SUB-RECEIVER PANEL METER 46
SELECTING A MODE FOR THE SUB-RECEIVER 46
FM CTCSS OPERATION 46
FM DCS OPERATION 46
TONE FREQ. ID SCAN 46
DCS CODE ID SCAN 46
ATTENUATOR 47
PRE-AMPLIFIER 47
DUAL WATCH 47
SCAN 47
NOISE REDUCTION 47
TRANSMITTING 47
SELECTING A TRANSMIT POWER 47
MICROPHONE GAIN 47
FM REPEATER OPERATION 47
REVERSE FUNCTION 47
AUTOMATIC SIMPLEX CHECK (ASC) 48
TRANSMITTING A TONE 48
MEMORY 48
Chapter 11 SPECIALIZED COMMUNICATIONS
PACKET RADIO 49
BUILT-IN TNC 49
PREPARATION 50
DCD SENSE 50
RADIO TELETYPEWRITING (RTTY) 51
AMTOR/PacTOR/CLOVER/G-TOR/PSK31 52
SLOW SCAN TV/FACSIMILE 52
DX PACKET CLUSTER TUNE 53
SATELLITE OPERATION 53
BASIC OPERATION 53
STORING SATELLITE MEMORY CHANNELS 54
RECALLING A SATELLITE MEMORY CHANNEL 54
SATELLITE CHANNEL NAME
QUICK MEMORY IN SATELLITE MODE 54
CHECKING THE UPLINK FREQUENCY 54
USING XIT/RIT IN SATELLITE MODE 54
CHANGING THE FREQUENCY BAND 54
Chapter 12 REJECTING INTERFERENCE
DSP FILTERS 55
CHANGING THE RECEIVE FILTER
BANDWIDTH 55
SSB/FM/AM Modes 55
CW/FSK Mode 55
NOTCH FILTER (SSB) 56
BEAT CANCEL (SSB/AM) 56
MANUAL BEAT CANCEL (CW/AM/SSB) 56
NOISE REDUCTION 56
Setting the N.R.1 Level Adjustment 56
Setting the N.R.2 Time Constant 56
NOISE BLANKER 57
PRE-AMPLIFIER 57
ATTENUATOR 57
Chapter 13 MEMORY FEATURES
MEMORY CHANNELS 58
STORING DATA IN MEMORY 58
Simplex Channels 58
Split-Frequency Channels 59
MEMORY RECALLAND SCROLL 59
Memory Recall 59
Memory Scroll 60
Temporary Frequency Changes 60
MEMORY-VFO SPLIT OPERATION 60
MEMORY TRANSFER 61
Memory > VFO Transfer 61
Channel > Channel Transfer 61
STORING FREQUENCY RANGES 62
Confirming Start/End Frequencies 62
Programmable VFO 62
Memory Channel Lockout 62
ERASING MEMORY CHANNELS 62
MEMORY CHANNEL NAME 63
MEMORY GROUP 64
Memory Group Select 64
QUICK MEMORY 64
STORING INTO QUICK MEMORY 64
RECALLING QUICK MEMORY CHANNELS 65
TEMPORARY FREQUENCY CHANGES 65
QUICK MEMORY > VFO TRANSFER 65
Chapter 14 SCAN
NORMAL SCAN 66
VFO SCAN 66
PROGRAM SCAN 67
PROGRAM SCAN PARTIALLY SLOWED 67
SCAN HOLD 68
MHz SCAN 68
MEMORY SCAN 68
SCAN RESUME METHOD 68
ALL-CHANNEL SCAN 68
GROUP SCAN 69
CALL SCAN 69
VISUAL SCAN 70
Using Visual Scan (VFO) 70
Changing the Number of Channels to Scan 70
Using Visual Scan (Memory Channel) 70
Chapter 15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES
ALT (Auto Lock Tuning) 72
ANTENNAS 72
HF/50 MHz BAND 72
VHF/UHF/1.2 GHZ BAND 72
APO (Auto Power OFF) 72
AUTOMATIC ANTENNA TUNER 72
Presetting 73
ATTENUATOR 73
AUTO MODE 73
BEEP FUNCTION 74
CALL CHANNEL 75
DISPLAY 75
BRIGHTNESS 75
CONTRAST 75
KEY ILLUMINATION 75
DTMF 75
MANUAL DTMF DIALING 75
DTMF MEMORY 75
Entering DTMF tones 75
Transmitting DTMF Memory Channel Data 76
DTMF Tone Time Length 76
DTMF Pause Period 76
HF RX ANTENNA 76
LINEAR AMPLIFIER CONTROL 76
LOCK FUNCTIONS 77
FREQUENCY LOCK FUNCTION 77
LOCK ALL FUNCTION 77
MICROPHONE PF KEYS 77
MONITOR 77
PF KEY 77
RISE TIME OF CW 77
RX DSP EQUALIZER 78
EQUALIZING RECEIVING AUDIO (SSB/FM/AM) 78
SEPARATE SPEAKER OUTPUT 78
S-METER SQUELCH 78
SQUELCH HANG TIME 78
TIME-OUT TIMER 78
TNC 79
TRANSVERTER 79
TX MONITOR 79
TX POWER 79
QUICK DATA TRANSFER 80
SETTING UP 80
Equipment Needed 80
Connections 80
USING QUICK TRANSFER 80
Transferring Data 80
Receiving Data 80
COMPUTER CONTROL 81
SETTING UP 81
Equipment Needed 81
Connections 81
COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS 81
REMOTE MICROPHONE CONTROLLER 81
WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROL (K-type ONLY) 82
PREPARATION 82
CONTROL OPERATION 82
SKY COMMAND II + (K-type ONLY) 83
PREPARATION 83
CONTROL OPERATION 84
USING TH-D7A AS A COMMANDER 85
CONTROL OPERATION 85
USING ANOTHER TS-2000 AS A COMMANDER 87
USING A SEPARATE TRANSPORTER 88
REPEATER FUNCTION (K-type ONLY) 88
LOCK-BAND REPEATER 88
CROSS-BAND REPEATER 88
HANG TIME FOR REPEATER FUNCTION 88
DRU-3A DIGITAL RECORDING UNIT (OPTIONAL) 89
RECORDING MESSAGES 89
MESSAGE PLAYBACK 89
Checking Messages 89
Sending Messages 90
Erasing a Recorded Message 90
Changing Inter-message Interval Time 90
Changing Playback Volume 90
VS-3 VOICE SYNTHESIZER (OPTIONAL) 91
MICROPROCESSOR RESET 92
INITIAL SETI-INGS 92
PARTIAL RESET 92
FULL RESET .92
Chapter 16 CONNECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT
COMPUTER 93
COMPATIBLE TRANSCEIVER 93
RTTY EQUIPMENT 94
HF LINEAR AMPLIFIER 94
ANTENNA TUNER 94
MCP AND TNC 95
TYPICAL MCP/TNC SETUP 96
LINEAR AMPLIFIER (50 MHz, 144 MHz, 430 (440) MHz and 1.2 GHz)
96
Chapter 17 INSTALLING OPTIONS
REMOVING THE BOTTOM CASE 97
DRU-3A DIGITAL RECORDING UNIT 97
VS-3 VOICE SYNTHESIZER UNIT 97
MB-430 MOBILE BRACKET 98
RC-2000 REMOTE PANEL 98
Chapter 18 MAINTENANCE
GENERAL INFORMATION 99
SERVICE 99
SERVICE NOTE 99
CLEANING 99
LITHIUM BATTERY 99
TROUBLESHOOTING 100
OPERATION NOTICES 103
TX SIGNAL HARMONICS 103
INTERNAL BEATS 103
VISUAL SCAN 103
SENSITIVITY (K-type ONLY) 103
AGC 103
SUB-RECEIVER 103
Chapter 19 OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 104
Chapter 20 SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS 105
Chapter 21 APPENDIX
TS-B2000 FRONT PANEL 109
BUILT-IN TNC COMMAND LIST 110
COM CONNECTOT 113
HARDWARE DESCRIPTION 113
CONTROL OPERATION 113
COMPUTER CONTROL 114
Alphabetical Commands 114
Parameters 114
Terminator 114
Error Messages 114
PC CONTROL COMMAND TABLES 115
Chapter 22 INDEX
INDEX 142
Installation
InStall and connect an antenna {Page 1}.
Install a ground system that satisfies DC & RF grounding
requirements {page 1}.
InStall lightning protection to protect the antenna system,
your personal safety, and your property
(page 1).
Install and connect a DC power supply {page 2}.
Connect all accessories to the transceiver {pages 3, 94}.
Accessories include the following:
- Microphone
- Headphones
- Antenna Tuner
- External Speaker
- CW Key
- RTTY Equipment
- Computer
- Linear Amplifier
- TNC/Multimode
- Remote Panel
- Communications Processor
ANTENNA CONNECTION
An antenna system consists of an antenna, feed line, and ground.
The transceiver can give excellent
results if the antenna system and its installation are given
careful attention. Use a properly adjusted
50 antenna of good quality, a high-quality 50 coaxial cable,
and first-quality connectors. All
connections must be clean and tight. After making the connections,
match the impedance of the coaxial
cable and antenna so that the SWR is 1.5:1 or less. High SWR
will cause the transmit output to drop
and may lead to radio frequency interference to consumer products
such as stereo receivers and
televisions. You may even interfere with your own transceiver.
Reports that your signal is
distorted could indicate that your antenna system is not efficiently
radiating the transceiver's power.
Connect your primary HF/50 MHz antenna feed line to ANT 1
on the rear of the transceiver. If you are
using two HF/50 MHz antennas, connect the secondary antenna
to ANT 2. Connect VHF (144 MHz),
UHF (430/440 MHz), and 1.2 GHz (TS-2000/TS-B2000 Optional)
antennas to their respective antenna
connectors on the rear of the transceiver. Refer to page 13
for the location of the
antenna connectors.
Transmitting without connecting an antenna or other matched
load may damage the transceiver. Always
connect the antenna to the transceiver before transmitting.
All fixed stations should be equipped with a lightning arrester
to reduce the risk of fire, electric
shock, and transceiver damage.
Note: The transceiver's protection circuit will activate
when the SWR
is greater than 2.5:1; however, do not rely on protection
to compensate for a poorly functioning
antenna system.
GROUND CONNECTION
At the minimum, a good DC ground is required to prevent such
dangers as electric shock. For superior
communications results, a good RF ground is required, against
which the antenna system can
operate. Both of these conditions can be met by providing
a good earth ground for your station. Bury
one or more ground rods or a large copper plate under the
ground, then connect this to the transceiver
GND terminal. Use heavy gauge wire or a copper strap, cut
as short as possible, for this connection.
Do not use a gas pipe, an electrical conduit, or a plastic
water pipe as a ground.
LIGHTNING PROTECTION
Even in areas where lightning storms are less common, there
are usually a limited number of
storms each year. Consider carefully how to protect your equipment
and home from lightning. The
installation of a lightning arrestor is a start, but there
is more that you can do. For example,
terminate your antenna system transmission lines at an entry
panel that you install outside your home.
Ground this entry panel to a good outside ground, then connect
the appropriate feed lines between the entry panel and
your transceiver. When a lightning storm occurs, disconnecting
the feed lines from your transceiver will
ensure added protection.
1 INSTALLATION
DC POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION
In order to use this transceiver, you need a separate 13.8
V DC power supply that must be purchased
separately. Do not directly connect the transceiver to an
AC outlet. Use the supplied DC power cable to
connect the transceiver to a regulated power supply. Do not
substitute a cable with smaller gauge wires.
The current capacity of the power supply must be 20.5 A peak
or more.
First, connect the DC power cable to the regulated DC power
supply; the red lead to the positive terminal
and the black lead to the negative terminal. Next, connect
the DC power cable to the transceiver's DC
power connector. Press the connectors firmly together until
the locking tab clicks.
Note:
- Before connecting the DC power supply to the transceiver,
be sure to switch OFF the DC power supply
and transceiver.
- Do not plug the DC power supply into an AC outlet until
you make all connections.
UTILIZING THE BAIL (TS-2OOO(X) ONLY)
This transceiver is equipped with a bail so that you can
angle the transceiver. The bail is located on
the bottom of the transceiver. Pull the bail forward to the
limit as shown.
REPLACING FUSES
If a fuse blows, determine the cause then correct the problem.
Only after the problem has been resolved,
replace the blown fuse with a new one with the specified ratings.
If newly installed fuses continue to
blow, disconnect the power plug and contact a KENWOOD service
station or your dealer for assistance.
Fuse Location TS-2000 (X)/TS-B000=Fuse current rating of 4A
(for external antenna tuner)
Supplied DC power cable Has fuse current rating of 25A.
ACCESSORY CONNECTIONS
FRONT PANEL
- Headphones (PHONES)
Connect monaural or stereo headphones having a 4 to 32 impedance.
This jack accepts a
6.3 mm (1/4") diameter, 2-conductor (mono) or 3-conductor
(stereo) plug. After connecting the
headphones, you will hear no sound from the internal (or optional
external) speaker.
Microphone (MIC)
Connect a microphone having an impedance between 250 and 600.
Fully insert the connector,
then screw the retaining ring clockwise until secure. Compatible
microphones include the
MC-43S, MC-47, MC-52DM, MC-60A, MC-80, MC-85, and MC-90. Do
not use the MC-44, MC-44DM, MC-45, MC-45E,
MC-45DM, MC-45DME, and MC-53DM microphones.
REAR PANEL
- External Speakers (EXT.SP1/EXT.SP2)
This transceiver has 2 independent receivers. Thus, it can
output 2 separate audio signals. As a
default, the transceiver mixes both audio signals internally
and outputs them from the internal
speaker. On the rear panel of the transceiver, there are 2
external speaker jacks. If an external
speaker is connected to EXP.SP1, the internal speaker will
mute. If the speaker is connected to
EXT.SP2, both the external speaker and the internal speaker
will function. Use only external
speakers with an impedance of 4 to 8 (8 nominal). These jacks
accept only 3.5 mm (1/8")
diameter, 2-conductor (mono) plugs.
WARNING: DO NOT connect headphones to this jack. The high
audio output could damage your hearing.
Keys for CW (PADDLE and KEY) For CW operation using the internal
electronic keyer, connect a keyer
paddle to the PADDLE jack. For CW operation without using
the internal electronic keyer, connect a
straight key, semi-automatic key (bug), electronic keyer,
or the CW keyed output from a Multimode
Communications Processor (MCP) to the KEY jack. The PADDLE
and KEY jacks mate with a
6.3 mm (1/4") 3-conductor plug and a 3.5 mm (1/8")
2-conductor plug respectively. External
electronic keyers or MCPs must use positive keying to be compatible
with this transceiver. Use
a shielded cable between the key and the transceiver.
Note: Due to the functionality of the internal electronic
keyer, you may find it unnecessary
to connect both a paddle and another type of keyer unless
you want to use a PC-based keyer for CW.
Read the "ELECTRONIC KEYER" section {page 42} to
become familiar with the internal keyer.
YOUR FIRST QSO HF/ 50 MHz band)
Are you ready to give your TS-2000(X) a quick try? Reading
these two pages should get your voice on the
air in your first QSO on the HF/50 MHz band shortly. The instructions
below are intended only for a quick
guide. If you encounter problems or there is something you
don't understand, read the detailed explanations
given later in this manual.
RECEIVING
Note: This section explains only keys and controls required
to briefly try the transceiver.
1. Set the following as specified:
MAIN AF" Fully counterclockwise
MAIN RF GAIN: Fully clockwise
MAIN SQL: Fully counterclockwise
2. Switch ON the DC power supply, then press and hold [ ¢b
] (POWER) briefly on the transceiver.
Do not press the switch for more than approximately 2 seconds;
the transceiver will be switched OFF.
Upon power up, "HELLO" appears, followed by the
selected frequency and other indicators.
3. Confirm that VFO A has been selected for communications;
" A" should be visible on
the display. If it has not, press [A/B] to select VFO A.
4. Turn the MAIN AF control slowly clockwise until you hear
a suitable level of background
noise.
5. Press [+] or [-] to select an HF/50 MHz Amateur radio band.
6. Press [LSB/USB/AUTO] or [FM/AM/NAR] to select an operating
mode.
- To select the second mode on each key, press the same key
again. For example,
each press of [LSB/USB/AUTO] switches between LSB and USB
modes.
7. If you have selected FM, turn the MAIN SQL control clockwise
until the background noise is
just eliminated; the MAIN band LED (above the [MIC/CAR] key)
turns off.
- With LSB or USB selected, skip this step.
8. Turn the Tuning control to tune in a station.
- If you do not hear any stations, you may have the wrong
antenna connector selected.
Press [FUNC], [AT/ANT1/2] to switch between the antenna 1
and 2 connectors.
TRANSMITTING
1. Turn the Tuning control to tune in a desired station or
to select an unused frequency.
2. Press [AT/ANT1/2] momentarily. "AT TX" appears.
3. Press and hold [AT/ANT1/2] to activate the built-in antenna
tuner.
- "AT TX" starts blinking and the MAIN band LED
above the [MIC/CAR] key turns red.
- Tuning should be completed in under 20 seconds, then "AT
tx" stops blinking.
- If tuning is not completed within 20 seconds, error beeps
sound. Press [AT/ANT1/2] to stop
the error beeps and quit tuning. Check your antenna system
before continuing. If you do
not press [AT/ANT1/2], tuning will continue for approximately
60 seconds.
Note: You will hear a lot of clicking sounds coming from
the transceiver while the antenna
tuner is trying to tune the antenna. This is simply the relay
switches turning ON and OFF.
4. With LSB, USB, or AM selected, press [MIC/CAR] to activate
the Microphone Gain Adjust.
- "MIC GAIN 50" appears.
- With FM selected, skip this step.
5. Press [SEND].
- The MAIN band LED turns red.
6. Begin speaking into the microphone in your normal tone
of voice.
7. LSB/USB: While speaking into the microphone, adjust the
MULTI/CH control so that the ALC
meter reflects according to your voice level.
- AM: While speaking into the microphone, adjust the MULTI/CH
control so that the calibrated
power meter slightly reflects to your voice level.
- FM: Skip this step.
8. When you finish speaking, press [SEND] to return to receive
mode.
9. Press [MIC/CAR] to quit the Microphone Gain Adjustment.
Note: If desired, access Menu No. 41 {page 28} to try the
Microphone Gain Adjust for FM.
This completes your introduction to the TS-2000(X), but there
is a great deal more to know.
"OPERATING BASICS" {page 18} and the following chapters
explain all the functions of this transceiver,
starting with the most basic, commonly-used functions.
If your primary operating band is VHF (144 MHz) or UHF (430/440
MHz), the TS-2000(X) can also serve you
as a powerful All-mode VHF/UHF transceiver. The instructions
below are intended only for a quick guide to
get you up on the air on the VHF/UHF band. If you encounter
problems or there is something you don't
understand, read the detailed explanations given later in
this manual.
RECEIVING
Note: This section explains only keys and controls required
to
briefly try the transceiver.
1. Set the following as specified:
- MAIN AF: Fully counterclockwise
- MAIN RF GAIN: Fully clockwise
- MAIN SQL." Fully counterclockwise
2. Switch ON the DC power supply, then press and hold [ d
] (POWER) briefly on the transceiver.
-Do not press the switch for more than approximately 2 seconds;
the transceiver will be switched OFF.
-Upon power up, "HELLO" appears, followed by the
selected frequency and other indicators.
3. Press [MAIN], then confirm that VFO A has been selected
for communications; "4 A" should be visible
on the display. If it has not, press [A/B] to select VFO A.
4. Turn the MAIN AF control slowly clockwise until you hear
a suitable level of background noise.
5. Press [+] or [-] to move up to the VHF (144 MHz) or UHF
(430/440 MHz) Amateur radio band.
6. Confirm that the operating mode is FM. If it is not, press
[FM/AM/NAR] to select FM.
7. Turn the SOL control clockwise until the background noise
is just eliminated; the MAIN
band LED turns off.
8. Turn the Tuning control to tune in a station.
You can use the MULTI/CH control to change the frequency
faster. If you do not hear any stations,
the antenna may not be installed or connected properly. Check
the antenna connector on the rear panel
{page 13}.
TRANSMITTING
1. Confirm that the operating mode is FM. If it is not, press
[FM/AM/NAFi] to change the operating
mode to FM.
2. Turn the Tuning control or the MULTI/CH control to tune
in a desired station or to select an unused
frequency.
3. Press [SEND].
- The MAIN band LED turns red.
4. Begin speaking into the microphone in your normal tone
of voice.
5. When you finish speaking, press [SEND] to return to receive
mode.
This completes your introduction on how to receive and transmit
using the TS-2000(X) on a VHF/UHF
band. Refer to "OPERATING BASICS" {page 18} and
the following chapters for explanations on all the
functions of this transceiver.
GETTING ACQUAINTED
FRONT PANEL (refer to tactile graphics which is in progress)
1. PF key - You can assign a function to this Programmable
Function key. The default function is
Voice 1 {page 77}.
2. [ O ] (POWER) switch - Press and hold briefly to switch
the transceiver power ON. Press again
to switch the power OFF.
3. ATT/F LOCK key - Press to switch the receiver attenuator
ON or OFF {page 57}. Press [FUNC],
[ATT/F LOCK] to switch the Frequency Lock function ON or OFF
{page 77}.
4. PRE/LOCK A key - Press to switch the receiver pre-amplifier
ON or OFF {page 57}. Press [FUNC],
[PRE/LOCK A] to lock all the transceiver keys {page 77}.
5. VOX/LEVEL key - In voice mode, press to switch the Voice-Operated
Transmit function ON or OFF
(page 39). In CW mode, press to switch the Break-in function
ON or OFF {page 42}. Press [FUNC],
[VOX/LEVEL] to adjust the microphone input level for VOX operation.
The VOX LED lights orange
when the VOX function is active.
6. PROC/LEVEL key - Press to switch the Speech Processor
for transmitting ON or OFF {page 40}.
Press [FUNC], [PROC/LEVEL] to adjust the Speech Processor
input level. The PROC LED lights orange
when the Speech Processor function is actived.
7. SEND key - Press to switch the transceiver between receive
mode and transmit mode {pages 5, 7}.
8. AT/ANT1/2 key - Press to activate the internal antenna
tuner {page 72} or an external antenna tuner.
Press [FUNC], [AT/ANT1/2] to select either Antenna 1 or Antenna
2 for the HF/50 MHz band {page 72}.
9. PHONES jack - Connect a set of headphones to this jack.
Inserting a plug into the jack automatically
mutes the audio from the speaker {pages 3, 78}.
10. MIC connector - Connect a compatible microphone to this
connector, then securely screw down the
connector locking ring {page 3}.
11. N.R./LEVEL key - Press to switch the DSP Noise Reduction
function ON or OFF. Press [FUNC],
[N.R./LEVEL] to adjust the Noise Reduction level. Press [FUNC],
[N.R./LEVEL] again to finish the
adjustment {page 56}.
12. A.N./LEVEL key - Press to switch the DSP Auto Notch function
ON or OFF. Press [FUNC], [A.N./LEVEL]
to adjust the DSP Auto Notch reduction level. Press [FUNC],
[A.N./LEVEL] again to finish the
adjustment {page 56}.
13. B.C./MANUAL key - Press to switch the DSP Auto Beat Cancel
function ON or OFF. Press [FUNC],
[B.C./MANUAL] to adjust the beat cancel frequency manually.
Press [FUNC], [B.C./MANUAL] again
to finish the manual adjustment {page 56}.
14. Multi-purpose keypad - Consists of 10 keys that are used
to enter numeric data. Also used for the
following functions:
- (1) CHI/REC, (2)/CH2/REC, and (3)/ CH3/REC keys - Press
to play back or record the CW or voice
messages that are associated with the DRU-3A Digital Recording
Unit {page 89} and the
internal electronic keyer {page 43}.
- (4) TONE/SEL key - Press to activate the sub-audible Tone
function to access repeaters for FM mode.
To select the Tone frequency, press [FUNC], [4/ TONE/SEL],
then select your desired tone frequency
using the MULTI/CH control {page 33}.
- (5) METER key - Press to select the meter scales {page 19}.
- (6) CTCSS/SEL key - Press to activate the Continuous Tone
Coded Squelch System (CTCSS) function
for FM mode. To select the CTCSS tone frequency, press [FUNC],
[5/ CTCSS/SEL], then select your
desired CTCSS tone frequency using the MULTI/CH control {page
35}.
- (7) NB/LEVEL key - Press to switch the Noise Blanket ON
or OFF. Press [FUNC], [7/ NB/LEVEL]
to adjust the Noise Blanker level {page 57}.
- (8) AGC/OFF key - Press to adjust the response time of the
Automatic Gain Control. To switch
the AGC OFF, press [FUNC], [8/AGC/OFF] {page 38}.
- (9) FINE/STEP key - Press to activate the Fine tuning mode
to allow more precise tuning {page 38}.
- (0) DCS/SEL key - Press to activate the Digital Coded Squelch
function for FM mode. To select the
DCS code, press [FUNC], [°/DCS/SEL], then select your
desired code using the MULTI/CH control
{page 36}.
- 0/SHIFT/OFFSET key - Press to switch the Shift function
for FM mode ON
or OFF when accessing the repeaters. The Shift frequency can
be manually
adjusted by pressing [FUNC], [0/SHIFT/OFFSET], then adjusting
the shift frequency
value using the MULTI/CH control {page 32}.
- ENT key - Press to enter your desired frequency using the
keypad {page 37}.
15. FUNC key - Press to access the secondary functions that
are assigned to the keys. While FUNC is
active, the FUNC LED lights orange.
16. MIC/CAR key - Press to adjust the microphone gain {page
20}. While the Speech Processor function
is ON, it becomes the Speech Processor output level adjustment
key {page 40}.
- Press [FUNC], [MIC/CAR] to adjust the carrier level for
CW, FSK and AM mode {page 20}.
17. PWR/ TX MONI key - Press to adjust the output power {page
20}. Press [FUNC], [PWR/TX MONI] to
monitor your transmission signal {page 79}.
18. KEY/DELAY key - Press to adjust the internal electronic
keyer speed. Press [FUNC], [KEY/DELAY]
to adjust the VOX delay time or break-in time (Full break-in/Semi
break-in time) for CW
mode {page 42}.
19. LSB/USB/AUTO key - Press to select lower sideband (LSB)
or upper sideband (USB) mode for voice
or digital operation. Press [FUNC], [LSB/USB/AUTO] to toggle
the auto mode selection {page 73}.
20. CW/FSK/REV key - Press to select CW or FSK (Frequency
Shift Keying) mode {pages 30, 51}.
Press [FUNC], [CW/FSK/REV] to reverse the sideband pitch.
21. FM/AM/NAR key - Press to select FM or AM mode {pages
28, 29}. Press [FUNC], [FM/AM/NAR] to select
narrow bandwidth transmission mode {page 29}.
22. CLR key - Press to exit from, abort, or reset various
functions. Also used to erase memory
channels {page 62} or locking out memory channels from the
scan list {page 62}.
23. DISP key - Press to toggle the normal operating mode
and DSP filter setting display mode {page 55}.
Press and hold to start the Visual Scan function {page 70}.
24. 1MHz/SEL key - Press to switch the MHz Up/Down function
ON or OFF using the MULTI/CH control.
Press [FUNC], [1MHz/SEL] to change the increment/decrement
step value {page 37}. Press and hold
to start the MHz Scan function {page 68}.
25. Tuning control - Turn to select the desired frequency
{page 37}. Use the convenient finger-tip
cavity for continuous tuning. The lever behind this control
adjusts the control torque level;
turn fully clockwise for light torque or fully counterclockwise
for heavy torque.
26. CTRL key - Press to toggle the operating controls between
the main transceiver and the sub-receiver.
The transmition band is not affected by this key.
27. MENU key - Press to select or cancel the Menu mode that
is used for activating and configuring
functions {page 21}.
28. TF-SET key - While operating split-frequency, press to
monitor or change your transmit frequency
{page 31}.
29. +/- (Up/Down) keys - Press to step through all the Amateur
radio bands consecutively {page 18}.
Also used to make selections from the Menu {page 21}, and
to check the Start and End frequencies
of the Scan function {page 62}.
30. MAIN key - Press to transfer the operating controls to
the MAIN transceiver. Also moves the
transmission band to the main transceiver frequency.
31. SUB key - Press to transfer the operating controls to
the sub-receiver. Also moves the
transmission band to the sub-receiver frequency.
32. SCAN/SG.SEL key - Press to start or stop the Scan function
{page 66}. Press [FUNC], [SCAN/SG.SEL]
to select a scan group {page 69}.
33. CALL/C.IN key - Press to recall a call channel for the
selected operating band
(HF/50 MHz/144 MHz/430 (440) MHz/1.2 GHz (TS-2000/TS-B2000
Optional)). Press [FUNC],
[CALL/C.IN] to write a new Call Channel to the memory {page
75}.
34. QUICK MEMO keys - Controls the Quick Memory function
{page 64}.
1) MR key - Press to recall data from the Quick Memory {page
65}.
2) M.IN key - Press to write data into the Quick Memory {page
64}.
35. SATL key - Press to activate Satellite communication
mode {page 53}.
36. Frequency control keys - These keys control functions
related to selecting a
frequency, a VFO, or a memory channel.
1) A/B/M/S key - Press to select either VFO A or VFO B {page
18}. In Satellite mode,
press to swap the MAIN and SUB frequencies so that you can
change the frequencies
with a main Tuning control {page 54}.
2) SPLIT/REV key - Press to use split-frequency operation
which allows you to use different
transmit and receive frequencies {page 31}. In Satellite mode,
press to toggle the Trace
Reverse function ON and OFF {page 54}.
3) VFO/M / VFO/CH key - Press to select either Memory or VFO
mode {page 59}. In Satellite mode,
press to toggle the VFO and memory channel operations {page
54}.
4) A=B/TRACE key - Press to copy the data in the currently
selected VFO to the other VFO
{page 31}. In Satellite mode, press to toggle the TRACE function
ON and OFF {page 54}.
37. M. VFO/MG.SEL key - Press to transfer data from a memory
channel to a VFO {page 61}.
Press [FUNC], [M/VFO/MG.SEL] to enter Memory Group Select
mode {page 64}.
38. M.IN key - Writes data into a memory channel {page 58}
or selects Memory Scroll mode {page 60}.
39. RIT/CW TUNE key - Press to switch the Receive Incremental
Tuning function ON or OFF {page 38}.
Press [FUNC], [RIT/CW TUNE] to activate the automatic zero-beat
function for CW mode {page 30}.
40. XIT/ALT key - Press to switch the Transmit Incremental
Tuning function ON or OFF {page 40}.
Press [FUNC], [XIT/ALT] to switch the Auto Lock Tuning mode
for the 1.2 GHz band (FM) ON or
OFF {page 72}.
41. CLEAR key - Press to reset the RIT/XIT frequency offset
to zero {pages 38, 40}.
42. SET/P.C.T. key - Press to set received DX Packet Cluster
frequency data to the main transceiver
when the Packet Cluster Tune mode is activated. Press [FUNC],
[SET/P.C.T.] to switch the Packet
Cluster Tune mode ON or OFF {page 53}.
43. TNC Status Indicators
1) 9.6k LED - Lights when the internal TNC is operating at
9600 bps. The default operating mode
is 1200 bps {page 50}.
2) STA LED - Lights when the internal TNC holds the data in
the buffer to transmit.
3) CON LED - Lights when the internal TNC is connected to
another TNC.
44. RIT/SUB control - After switching the RIT or XIT function
ON, turn this control to select the
desired frequency offset {pages 38, 40}. Turn to adjust the
sub-receiver frequency when the
RIT and XIT functions are switched OFF and the sub-receiver
is switched ON {page 45}.
45. MANUAL BC control - Turn to adjust the audio notch frequency
while the DSP beat cancel function
is set to the manual frequency adjustment mode {page 56}.
46. MAIN RF GAIN control - Turn to adjust the radio frequency
gain for the main transceiver {page 18}.
47. MULTI/CH control - In VFO mode, rotate to step the operating
frequency up or down {page 37}.
In memory channel mode, rotate to select a memory channel
{page 58}. Also used for selecting
Menu numbers when accessing the Menu mode {page 21} and as
a selector to choose settings for
various functions activated by front panel buttons. The MULTI/CH
LED lights when the
setting(s) can be changed using the MULTI/CH control.
48. MAIN SQL control - Used for muting ("squelching")
the speaker, the head phones and AF output
on ACC2 (13-pin DIN connector) when no receive signal is present
on the main transceiver {page 19}.
49. MAIN AF control - Turn to adjust the volume on the main
transceiver {page 19}.
50. SUB SQL control - Used for muting ("squelching")
the speaker, head phone and AF output on ACC2
(13-pin DIN connector) when no receive signal is present on
the sub-receiver {page 46}.
51. SUB AF control - Press to switch the sub-receiver ON
or OFF. When it is ON, the SUB-receiver
LED lights orange. Turn to adjust the volume for the sub-receiver.
52. LO/WIDTH control - Turn clockwise/counterclockwise to
increase/decrease the value for the low
cut-off DSP filter frequency or the filter bandwidth (CW/FSK).
The selected value appears on the
main dot-matrix display {page 55}.
53. HI/SHIFT control - Turn clockwise/counterclockwise to
increase/decrease the value for the high
cut-off DSP filter frequency or the Shift frequency. The selected
value appears on the sub
dot-matrix display {page 55}.
54. MAIN band LED - Lights green while the main transceiver's
squelch is open. Lights red while
transmitting on the main transceiver's VFO band.
55. SUB band LED - Lights green while the sub-receiver's
squelch is open. Lights red while
transmitting on the sub-receiver's VFO band.
REAR PANEL
1. Ant 1 and ANT 2 connectors - Connect your primary HF/50
MHz antenna to ANT1. If you are using
2 antennas for the HF/50 MHz band, connect the secondary antenna
to the ANT2 connector.
2. GND post - Connect a heavy gauge wire or copper strap
between the ground post and the nearest
earth ground {page 1}.
3. KEY and PADDLE jacks - The PADDLE jack mates with a 6.3
mm (1/4") 3-conductor plug for connecting
a keyer paddle to the internal electronic keyer. The KEY jack
mates with a 3.5 mm (1/8")
2-conductor plug for connecting an external key for CW operation.
Read "Keys for CW
(PANEL and KEY)" {page 3} before using these jacks.
4. AT connector - Mates with the connector on the cable supplied
with the external antenna tuner.
Refer to the instruction manual supplied with the tuner for
more information.
5. ANT 144 - Connect your 144 MHz band antenna to this connector.
6. ANT 430 - Connect your 430 (440) MHz band antenna to this
connector.
7. ANT 1.2G (TS-2000/TS-B2000 Optional) - Connect your 1.2
GHz band antenna to this connector.
8. DC 13.8V power input connector - Connect a 13.8 V DC power
source to this connector
(page 2}. Use the cable supplied with the regulated DC power
supply.
9. COM connector - Mates with a 9-pin female RS-232C connector
for connecting a computer via
one of its serial communication ports {page 93}. Also used
with the Quick Data Transfer function
{page 93}.
10. PANEL connector - Connect a cable from the optional separate
remote panel (RC-2000) to this connector.
11. EXT.SP1 and EXT.SP2 jacks - Mate with a 3.5 mm (1/8"),
2-conductor (mono) plugs for connecting
external speakers {pages 3, 78}.
12. EXT.CONT connector - Connect your 50 MHz, 144 MHz, 430
(440) MHz or 1.2 GHz linear amplifier control
cable to this connector {page 76}.
13. ACC2 connector - Mates with a 13-pin male DIN connector
for connecting various accessory equipment,
such as an external TNC/MCP or a RTTY terminal {page 94}.
14. REMOTE connector - Mates with a 7-pin male DIN connector
for connecting an HF linear amplifier
{page 76}. Do not connect 50 MHz, 144 MHz, 430 (440) MHz,
or 1.2 GHz linear amplifier controls
to this connector; use the EXT.CONT connector instead.
15. HF RX ANT connector - Connect a separate receive-only
antenna for HF low bands to this jack
(RCA connector) {page 76}.
DISPLAY
1. METER - While receiving, serves as an S-meter to measure
and display the received signal strength.
It also displays the filter width. While transmitting, serves
as a power meter plus an ALC meter,
an SWR meter, or a Speech Processor compression meter. The
Peak Hold function holds each reading
for approximately half a second.
Note: SWR meter works only for the HF and 50 MHz bands.
2. RX Appears while the internal antenna tuner {page 72}
or an external antenna tuner is in-line
for the HF/50 MHz band reception.
3. AT TX - Appears while the internal antenna tuner {page
72} or an external antenna tuner is
in-line for the HF/50 MHz band transmission.
4. EXT Appears while HF RX ANT {page 76} connector is enabled
to receive HF band signals. You cannot
transmit the signals though this connector.
5. ANT 1 2 - Either "ANT 1" or "ANT 2"
appears, depending on whether the Antenna 1 connector or the
Antenna 2
connector is selected for the HF/50 MHz band {page 72}.
6. MHz - Appears when the MHz Up/Down mode using the MULTI/CH
control is switched ON {page 37}.
7. ALT - Appears when ALT (Auto Lock Tuning) is activated
for the 1.2 GHz (FM) band {page 72}.
8. M.CH - Appears while Memory Recall or Memory Scroll is
being used {page 59}.
9. 2/1 8.8. Shows the memory channel number for the main
transceiver. If you select a channel over 99,
a leading digit (1 or 2) appears (the memory number ranges
from 00 to 299). It also shows the Ouick
Memory number location (the Ouick Memory number ranges from
"0_" to "9_").
10. AUTO - Appears when Auto mode selection is activated
{page 73}.
11. PTT - Appears when the main transceiver is selected for
the transmission band.
12. CTRL - Appears when the main transceiver's functions
can be controlled using the front panel keys.
13. ATT - Appears when the main transceiver's receiver attenuator
(-12 dB) is ON {pages 57, 73}.
14. TNC - Appears when the internal TNG is assigned to the
main transceiver {page 49}.
15. PRE - Appears when the receiver pre-amplifier of the
main transceiver is ON {page 57}.
16. +- - "+" or "-" appears, indicating
which offset direction is selected for the main transceiver.
"=" appears when the -7.6 MHz (430MHz) or-6.0 MHz
(1.2 GHz) offset is selected (all E-types only)
{page 32}.
17. DCS - Appears when the DCS (Digital Code Squelch) of
the main transceiver is ON {page 36}.
18. [R] - "R" appears when the Reverse function
of the main transceiver is ON. "[R]" appears when
the ASC (Automatic Simplex Check) of the main transceiver
is activated {page 34}.
19. CT - "T" appears when the Tone function of
the main transceiver is ON {page 33}.
"C T" appears when the Continuous Tone Coded Squelch
System (CTCSS) of the main transceiver is
ON {page 35}.
20. AGC - Appears when the AGC (Automatic Gain Control) of
the main transceiver is ON {page 38}.
Disappears when the AGC is OFF.
21. M.B.C. - "B.C." appears when the automatic
Beat Canceller is ON. "M.B.C." appears when the
single
Beat Cancel frequency is manually controlled {page 56}.
22. NB - Appears when the Noise Blanket is ON {page 57}.
23. FINE - Appears when the Fine function for the main Tuning
control is ON {page 38}.
24. A.NOTCH - Appears when the DSP Auto Notch function of
the main transceiver is ON {page 56}.
25. N.R. 1 2 - "N.R.1" or "N..R. 2" appears,
depending on whether DSP Noise Reduction 1 (Line
Enhanced method) or Noise Reduction 2 (SPAC method) of the
main transceiver is selected {page 56}.
26. EQ T R - "EQ T" appears when the TX Equalizer
function is ON. "EQ R" appears when the RX Equalizer
function of the main transceiver is ON {pages 41,78}.
27. (star) - Appears when the Quick Menu function of the
transceiver is ON {page 21}. It also
appears when the frequency point of Program Scan Partially
Slowed is selected on the main-
transceiver {page 67}.
28.TRACER R - "TRACE" appears when the Trace function
is ON while in Satellite mode. "TRACEI"
appears when the Reverse Trace function is ON {page 53}.
29. P.C.T. - Appears when Packet Cluster Tune mode is ON
{page 53}.
30. SPLIT - Appears when the transmit frequency differs from
the receive frequency {page 31}.
31. <A> - " <A" or "A >"
appears while VFO A is selected {page 18}. "A" appears
while Menu A is being
accessed {page 21 }.
32. <B> - " <" or "B >,"
appears while VFO B is selected {page 18}. "B" appears
while Menu B is being
accessed {page 21}.
33. <4M> - "<M" or "M >"
appears while a simplex memory channel is selected {page 59}.
"< M >," appears
while a split frequency memory channel is selected {page 60}.
34. F LOCK A - "F LOCK" appears when the Frequency
Lock function is ON. "LOCK A" appears when the
Lock All key function is ON {page 77}.
35. (satellite icon) - Appears while in Satellite mode {page
53}.
36. M.CH - Appears while Memory Recall or Memory Scroll is
being used for the sub-receiver {page 59}.
37. 2/1 8.8. - Shows the memory channel number for the sub-receiver.
If you select a channel over 99,
a leading digit (1 or 2) appears (the memory number ranges
from 00 to 299).
38. PTT - Appears when the sub-receiver is selected for the
transmission band.
39. Appears when the sub-receiver's functions can be controlled
using the front panel keys.
40. ATT - Appears when the sub-receiver's receive attenuator
(-12 dB) is ON {pages 57, 73}.
41. TNC - Appears when the internal TNC is assigned to the
sub-receiver.
42. XIT - Appears when Transmit Incremental Tuning of the
main transceiver is ON {page 40}.
43. PRE - Appears when the receiver pre-amplifier of the
sub-receiver is ON {page 57}.
44. += - "+" or "-" appears, indicating
which offset direction is selected for the sub-receiver.
"=" appears when the -7.6 MHz (430MHz) or-6.0 MHz
(1.2 GHz) offset is selected (all E-types only)
{page 32}.
45. RIT - Appears when Receive Incremental Tuning of the
main transceiver is ON {page 38}.
46. DCS - Appears when the DCS /Digital Code Squelch/ of
the sub-receiver is ON {page 36}.
47. [R] - "R" appears when the Reverse function
of the sub-. receiver is ON. "[R]" appears
when the ASC /Automatic Simplex Check/ of the sub-receiver
is activated {page 341}.
48. s - Appears when the sub-receiver meter shows the signal
strength level {page 46}.
49. PWR - Appears when the sub-receiver meter shows the output
power level {page 20}.
50. Serves as an S-meter to measure and display the received
signal strength for the sub-receiver.
It also displays the relative output power when the sub-band
is selected for the transmission.
51. CT - "T" appears when the Tone function of
the sub-receiver is ON {page 331}. "C T" appears
when
the Continuous Tone Coded Squelch System/CTCSS/of the sub-receiver
is ON {page 35}.
52. N.R.1 - Appears when the DSP Noise Reduction 1 of the
sub-receiver is activated {page 56}.
53. PKT - Appears when the internal TNC is operating in Packet
mode {page 49}.
54. Pc - Appears when the TS-2000(X) is being controlled
by a PC {page 81}.
55. 1.8.8.8.8.8.8.8.8. - The main transceiver operating frequency
display.
56. 18.8.8.8.8.8.8.8 - When the sub-receiver is switched
ON, it shows the receive frequency
for the sub-receiver. However, if you are controlling the
main transceiver functions,
such as RIT, XIT, or SPLIT, it is used to display the frequency
information for these functions
{page 45}.
57. MAIN dot-matrix display - In the normal operating mode,
it displays the operating mode for
the main transceiver. It is also used to display various control
information, such as
menu numbers and settings and the DSP filter configuration.
58. SUB dot-matrix display - In the normal operating mode,
it displays the operating mode for the
sub-receiver. It is also used to display various control information,
such as menu
information and the DSP filter frequency configuration.
Microphone:
1. UP/DWN keys - Use these keys to step the VFO frequency,
memory channels, or Menu selections up
and down. Press and hold these keys to continuously change
the settings.
2. PTT (Push-to-Talk) switch The transceiver is placed in
transmit mode when this
non-locking switch is held down. Releasing the switch returns
the transceiver to receive mode.
SWITCHING POWER ON/OFF
1. Switch the DC power supply ON.
2. Press and hold (POWER) briefly to switch the transceiver
ON.
- Do not press the switch for more than approximately 2 seconds;
the transceiver will
be switched OFF
- Upon power up, "HELLO" appears, followed by the
selected frequency and other indicators.
3. To switch the transceiver OFF, press [ • ] (POWER)
again.
4. Switch the DC power supply OFF
- You may skip step 3. After switching the transceiver ON,
you can switch it OFF or ON
using only the power switch of the DC power supply. The transceiver
stores the information
of the POWER switch position when the DC power source is switched
OFE
ADJUSTING VOLUME
AUDIO FREQUENCY (AF) GAIN - Turn the MAIN AF control clockwise
to increase the audio level and
counterclockwise to decrease the level.
Note: The position of the MAIN AF control does not affect
the volume of beeps caused by pressing
keys nor the CW transmit sidetone. The audio level for Packet
operation is also independent
of the MAIN AF control setting.
When the optional RC-2000 is installed, you can control the
volume with the AF controls on both
the transceiver and the RC-2000. However, when turning the
transceiver on, the volume settings of
the RC-2000 have priority.
RADIO FREQUENCY (RF) GAIN - Set the MAIN RF GAIN control
fully clockwise. You may turn it
counterclockwise slightly when you have trouble hearing the
desired signal because of
excessive atmospheric noise or interference from other stations.
First take note of the peak S-meter
reading of the desired signal. Then turn the MAIN RF GAIN
control counterclockwise until the S-meter
reads the peak value that you noted. Signals that are weaker
than this level will be attenuated and
reception of the station will become easier.
Depending on the type and gain of your antenna, and the condition
of the band, you may also prefer
leaving the MAIN RF GAIN control turned counterclockwise by
the same amount rather than turning it fully
clockwise. When using FM mode, always set the MAIN RF GAIN
control fully clockwise.
SELECTING VFO A OR VFO B
2 VFOs are available for controlling the frequency on the
main transceiver. Each VFO, VFO A and VFO B,
works independently so that a different frequency and mode
can be selected. When SPLIT operation is
activated, VFO A is used for reception and VFO B is used for
transmission. The opposite combination is
also possible.
Press [A/B] to toggle between VFO A and VFO B.
"< A" or "< B" appears to indicate
which VFO is selected.
SELECTING A BAND
Press [+] or [-] to select your desired band.
Holding down either key changes the bands continuously.
SELECTING A MODE
Press [LSB/USB/AUTO], [CW/FSK/REV], or [FM/AM/NAR]. To select
the second mode on each
key, press the same key again. For example, each press of
[LSB/USB/AUTO] toggles between LSB
and USB mode.
Press [FUNC], [LSB/USB/AUTO] to toggle the Auto Mode Selection
for SSB. When it is active,
"AUTO" appears. If you change the frequency above
or below 9.5 MHz, the transceiver
automatically switches modes; LSB for frequencies under 9.5
MHz and USB for frequencies equal to or
above 9.5 MHz (HF/50 MHz band). As for the 144 MHz, 430 (440)
MHz, and 1.2 GHz bands, the
transceiver automatically changes the operating mode to FM.
You can further add the frequency
table data to change the mode automatically {page 73}.
ADJUSTING SQUELCH
The purpose of the Squelch is to mute the speaker when no
signals are present. With the squelch level
correctly set, you will hear sound only while actually receiving
signals. The higher the selected squelch
level, the stronger the signals must be to receive. The appropriate
squelch level depends on the
ambient RF noise conditions. Turn the MAIN SQL control, when
there are no signals present, to select
the squelch level at which the background noise is just eliminated;
the MAIN band LED will turn off.
Many ham operators prefer leaving the MAIN SQL control fully
counterclockwise unless operating on a
full-carrier mode such as FM. The squelch level for the main
transceiver is preset
at the factory to approximately 9 o'clock for FM and 11 o'clock
for SSB and AM.
SELECTING A FREQUENCY
Turn the Tuning control clockwise or press Mic [UP] to increase
the frequency. Turn the Tuning control
counterclockwise or press Mic [DWN] to decrease the frequency.
You may prefer directly entering a frequency using the numeric
keypad if the desired frequency is far
from the current frequency. Press [ENT], then press the numeric
keys as necessary. For details, see
"Direct Frequency Entry" {page 37}.
This transceiver provides many other methods for quickly
selecting a frequency. For further information,
see "SELECTING YOUR FREQUENCY" {page 37}.
FRONT PANEL METER
The multi-function meter measures the parameters in the table
below. The S-meter and FILTER scales
appear when the main transceiver is in receive mode, and the
PWR meter appears when it is in transmit
mode. Each press of [5/METER] switches among the ALC, SWR,
and COMP meters. Peak readings
for the S-meter, ALC, SWR, COMP, and PWR functions are held
momentarily.
S=Strength of received signals
PWR=Transmit output power
ALC=Automatic level control status
SWR=Antenna system standing wave ratio
COMP=Speech compression level when using the Speech Processor
{page 40}
FILTER= DSP filter width
Note: The COMP meter functions only when the Speech Processor
is ON for SSB, FM, or AM mode.
The PWR indicator shows the output power level as a percentage
on the 1.2 GHz band.
The SWR meter works only for ANT 1 andANT2 (HF/50 MHz band).
Peak Hold readings cannot be deactivated.
5 OPERATING BASICS
TRANSMITTING
For voice communications, press [SEND] or press and hold
Mic [PTT], then speak into the microphone
in your normal tone of voice. When you finish speaking, press
[SEND] again or release Mic [PTT].
To transmit CW, press [VOX/LEVEL] to switch the Break-in function
ON, then close the key or keyer
paddle. Connect a key or keyer paddle {pages 3, 39}, then
select CW mode.
For a detailed explanation on transmitting, see "BASIC
COMMUNICATIONS", beginning on page 28.
Note: When using AM, CW, or FSK mode, you may adjust the
carrier level In general adjust the level
so that the ALC meter reads within the limits of the ALC zone.
For the adjustment procedures,
refer to the instructions for each mode in "TRANSMISSION"
{pages 28, 29, 30}.
SELECTING TRANSMIT POWER
It is wise to select a lower transmit power if communication
is still reliable. This lowers the risk of
interfering with others on the band. When operating from battery
power, selecting a lower transmit power
allows you more operating time before a charge is necessary.
This transceiver allows you to change the
transmit power even while transmitting.
1. Press [PWR/TX MONI] - The current transmit power appears.
2. Turn the MULTI/CH control counterclockwise to reduce the
power or clockwise to increase the power.
The selectable range differs, depending on the current band
and mode.
3. Press [PWR/TX MONI] to complete the setting.
Note: You may access Menu No. 23, "FINE TRANSMIT POWER
TUNING", and select "ON" (press [+]) to
change the step size from 5 W to 1 W {page 79}.
MICROPHONE GAIN
The microphone gain must be adjusted when SSB or AM mode
is used without speech processing
{pages 28, 29}.
1. Press [MIC/CAR] - The current microphone gain level appears.
The default is 50; the range is
from 0 to 100.
2. Press [SEND] or press and hold Mic [PTT]. The MAIN band
LED lights red.
3. SSB: While speaking into the microphone, adjust the MULTI/CH
control so that the ALC meter
reflects your voice level, but does not exceed the ALC limit.
AM: While speaking into the
microphone, adjust the MULTI/CH control so that the calibrated
power meter slightly reflects
your voice level. CW, FSK: While transmitting, adjust the
MULTI/CH control so that the ALC meter
reflects the carrier level within the ALC zone.
4. Press [SEND] or release Mic [PTT] - The MAIN band LED lights
green or turns off,
depending on the MAIN SQL control setting.
5. Press [MIC/CAR] - For FM mode, access Menu No. 41 {page
28} and select "LOW", "MID", or "HIGH"
for the microphone gain.
Note: When using the optional MC-90 microphone in FM mode,
select "HIGH" for the microphone gain.
The microphone sensitivity is low in FM mode. This may cause
insufficient modulation. For other
microphones, select either "LOW" or "MID".
WHAT IS A MENU? Many functions on this transceiver are selected
or configured via a software-
controlled Menu, rather than through the physical controls
of the transceiver.
Once familiar with the Menu system, you will appreciate the
versatility it offers. You can customize
the various timings, settings, and programming functions on
this transceiver to meet your needs
without using many controls and switches.
MENU A/MENU B
This transceiver has two menus: Menu A and Menu B. These
menus contain identical functions
and can be configured independently. The transceiver, therefore,
allows you to switch between
two different environments quickly and easily. For example,
you can configure Menu A for DXing and
contesting while Menu B is for the relaxed local ragchewing.
By switching from Menu A to Menu B,
you can instantly change the Menu configuration and key assignment
to suit your current operating style.
Or, two operators may share a single transceiver by dedicating
one Menu to each operator. Both
operators can always enjoy their own configuration.
MENU ACCESS
1. Press [MENU] - The Menu No. and setting appear on the
main dot-matrix display, and the explanation
of the menu appears on the sub dot-matrix display.
2. Press [A/B] to select Menu A or Menu B. - "A"
or "B" appears, indicating which Menu is selected.
3. Turn the MULTI/CH control to select the desired Menu No.
Each time you change the Menu No., a
different scrolling message appears on the sub dot-matrix
display, describing the Menu No.
You will see "PUSH SUB" if there are sub-menus in
the Menu No. Pressing [SUB] allows
you to select from among the sub-menus. Press [MAIN] to exit
the sub-menu selection.
4. Press [+], [-], Mic [UP], or Mic [DWN] to select a parameter.
5. 5 Press [MENU] to exit Menu mode.
QUICK MENU
Because the number of functions this transceiver provides
is extraordinary, there are numerous items in
each Menu. If you find accessing desired Menu Nos. to be too
time consuming, use the Quick Menu to
create your own customized, abbreviated Menu. You can then
add those Menu Nos. which you frequently
use, to the Quick Menu. Copying Menu Nos. to the Quick Menu
has no effect on the Menu.
PROGRAMMING THE QUICK MENU
1 - Press [MENU].
2 - Turn the MULTI/CH control to select the desired Menu No.
3 - 3 Press QUICK MEMO [M.IN]. A star appears, indicating
that the Menu item has been added to the
Quick Menu. To remove the item from the Quick Menu, press
QUICK MEMO [M.IN] again.
4 - Press [MENU] to exit Menu mode.
Note: You cannot add a sub menu No. to the Quick Menu. Press
[MAIN] to go back to the main menu
No., then press QUICK MEMO [M.IN] to add the menu No. to the
Quick Menu.
USING THE QUICK MENU
1 - Press [MENU].
2 - Press [1MHz/SEL]. "MHz" appears.
3 - Turn the MULTI/CH control to select the desired Quick
Menu No.
4 - Press [+], [-], Mic [UP], or Mic [OWN] to change the current
setting for the selected Menu No.
5 - Press [MENU] to exit Quick Menu mode.
Note: ff the Quick Menu has not been programmed, turning
the MULTI/ CH control in step 3 causes
"CHECK" to be output in Morse code.
6 MENU SETUP
MENU CONFIGURATION
Operator interface
menu #00: Function=Display brightness OFF,1: minimum 4:
maximum. Selections OFF/1 to 4. Default=3. Ref page=75.
menu #01: Function=key illumination. Selections on/off. default=on.p.
75.
Tuning Control
menu#02: Function=tuning control change per revolution. selections=500/1000.
default=1000. ref. page 38.
menu#03: Function=tuning with MULTI/CH control. selections=on/off.
default=on. ref
page 37.
menu#04: Function=Rounds off VFO frequencies changed by using
the MULTI/CH control. selections=
on/off. default=on. ref. page 37
menu#o5: Function=9kHz frequency step size for the MULTI/CH
control in AM mode on the AM
broadcast band. selections=on/off. default=see reference page.
ref. page 37.
Memory channel
menu#06: function=memory channel. selections=press SUB to
access the sub-menu. default=none. no
ref. page.
menu#06A: function=memory-VFO split operation. selections=on/off.
default=off ref. page 60.
menu#06B: function=tunable (ON) or fixed (OFF) memory channel
frequencies. selections=on/off.
default=off. ref. page 60.
Scan Operation
menu#07: function=program scan partially slowed. selections=on/off.
default=on. ref. page 67.
menu#08: function=slow down frequency range for the Program
scan. selections=100/200/300/400/
500Hz. default=300 Hz. ref. page 67.
menu#09: function=program scan hold. selections=on/off. default=off.
ref. page 68.
menu#10: function=scan resume method. selections=TO (time-operated)/CO
(carrier-operated)
default=TO. ref. page 68.
menu#11: function=visual scan range. selections=31/61/91/181
channels. default=61 channels.
ref. page 70.
Monitor Sound
menu#12: function=beep output level (off,1:minimum,9:maximum)
selections=off/1 to 9. default=4.
ref. page 74.
menu#13: function=TX sidetone volume (Off,1:mainimum,9:maximum)
selections OFF/1 to 9. default=5.
ref. page 44.
menu#14: function=DRU-3A playback volume (OFF,1:minimum,9:maximum).
selections OFF/1 to 9. default=4.
ref. page 89.
menu#15: VS-3 playback volume (OFF,1:minimum,9:maximum) selections
oFF/1 to 9.default 4. ref. page 91.
Speaker Output
menu#16: function=audio output configuration for EXT.SP2 or
headphone:
0=SP1 (L):main/sub mix
0=SP2 (R):main/sub mix
1=SP1 (L): main
1=SP2 (R): sub.
2=SP1 (L): main+1/4 sub mix
2=SP2 (R): sub+1/4 sub mix.
selections=0/1/2. default=0. page 78.
menu#17: function=reverses the EXT.SP1 and EXT.SP2 (the headphone
jack L/R channels)
audio outputs. selections=on/off. default=off. ref. page=78.
RX Antenna
menu #18: function=enable an input from the HF RX ANT connector.
selections=on/off. default=off.
ref. page=76.
S-meter Squelch
menu #19: function=S-meter squelch. selections=press SUB to
access the sub-menu. default=off.
ref. page 78.
menu# 19A: function=enable S-meter squelch. selections=on/off.
default=OFF. ref. page 78.
menu#19B: function=hang time for S-meter squelch. selections=Off/125/250/500/ms.
default=off. ref
page 78.
DSD Equalizer
menu #20: function=DSP Equalizer.
Off: flat
H Boost: High boost
F Pass: Formant pass
B Boost: Bass boost
Conven: Conventional
User: Flat (reserved for ARCP software) . Selections=off/H
boost/f pass/b boost/
Conven/user. Default=off. Ref page 78, 104.
Menu#21: function=DSP TX equalizer
Off: flat
H Boost: high boost
F Pass: formant pass
B Boost: bass boost
Conven: conventional
User: Flat (reserved for ARCP software). Selections=off/H
boost/f pass/b boost/
Conven/user. Default=off. Ref page=41, 104
DSP Filter
Menu#22: function=DSP TX filter bandwidth for SSB or AM. Selections=2.0/2.2/2.4/2.6/2.8/3.0
kHz. Default=2.4 kHz. Ref page 41.
Fine Tuning
Menu#23: function=fine transmit power tuning. Selections=on/off.
Default=off. Ref. Page 38.
TOT
Menu #24: function=time-out timer. Selections=OFF/3/5/10/20/30
minutes. Default=off. Ref. Page 78.
Transverter
Menu #25: function=transverter frequency display. Selections=off/on.
Default=off. Ref. Page 79.
Antenna Tuner
Menu#26: function=TX hold when AT completes the tuning. Selections=off/on.
Default=off. Ref. Page=73.
Menu #27: function=in-line AT while receiving. Selections=off/on.
Default=off. Ref. Page 73.
Linear Amplifier
Menu # 28: function=linear amplifier control. Selections=press
SUB to access the sub-menu. No default or ref. Page.
Menu # 28A: function=linear amplifier control delay for HF
band. Selections=off/1/2. default=off. Ref. Page 76.
Menu # 28B: function=linear amplifier control delay for 50
MHz band. Selections=off/1/2. default=off. Ref. Page. 76.
Menu #28C: function=linear amplifier control delay for 144
MHz band. Selections=off/1/2. default=off. Ref. Page 76.
Menu #28D: function=linear amplifier control delay for 430
(440) MHz band. Selections=off/1/2. default=off. Ref. Page
76.
Menu # 28E: function=linear amplifier control delay for 1.2
GHz band. Selections=off/1/2. ref. Page. 76.
Message Playback
Menu #29: function=voice & CW message playback. Selections=press
SUB to access the sub-menu. No default or ref. Page.
Menu #29A: function=repeat the playback. Selections=off/on.
Default=off. Ref. Page 44, 90.
Menu #29B: function=interval time for repeating the playback.
Selections=0 to 60 seconds (in steps of 1 second) default=10
sec. Ref. Page 44, 90.
CW
Menu #30: function=keying priority over playback. Selections=off/on.
Default=off. Ref. Page 44.
Menu # 31: function=CW RX pitch/TX sidetone frequency. Selections=400
to 1000 Hz (in steps of 50 Hz) default=800 Hz. Ref. Page 30.
Menu #32: function=CW rise time. Selections=1/2/4/6 ms. Default=6
ms. Ref. Page 77
Menu #33: function=CW keying dot, dash weight ratio. Selections=auto/2.5
to 4.0 (in steps of 0.1) default=auto. Ref. Page 42.
Menu #34: function=reverse CW keying auto weight ration. Selections=off/on.
Default=off. Ref. Page 42.
Menu #35: function=bug key mode. Selections=off/on. Default=off.
Ref. Page 43.
Menu #36: function=auto CW TX in SSB mode. Selections=off/on.
Default=off. Ref. Page 44.
Menu #37: function=frequency correction in changing SSB to
CW. Selections=off/on. Default=off. Ref. Page 44.
FSK
Menu #38: function=FSK shift. Selections=170/200/425/850 Hz.
Default=170 Hz. Ref. Page 51.
Menu # 39: function=FSK keying polarity. Selections=normal/invers.
Default=normal. Ref. Page 51.
Menu #40: function=FSK tone frequency. Selections=1275/2125
Hz. Default=2125 Hz. Ref. Page 51.
FM
Menu #41: function=mic gain for FM. Selections=low/mid/high.
Default=low. Ref. Page 20.
Menu #42: function=sub-tone mode for FM. Selections=burst/cont.
default=see reference page) ref page 33.
Menu #43: function=auto repeater offset. Selections=off/on.
Default=on. Ref. Page 34.
Menu #44: function=TX hold: 1750 Hz tone. Selections=off/on.
Default=off. Ref. Page 33.
DTMF
Menu #45: function=DTMF functions. Selections=press SUB to
access the sub-menu. No default or ref. Page.
Menu #45A: function=DTMF number memory select. Selections=press
SUB to access the sub-menu. No default or ref. Page.
Menu #45B: function=TX speed for stored DTMF number. Selections=slow/fast.
Default=fast. Ref. Page. 76.
Menu #45C: function=pause duration for stored DTMF number.
Selections=100/250/500/750/1000/1500/2000 ms. Default=500
ms. Ref. Page 76.
Menu #45D=function=enable Mic remote control. Default=off/on.
Ref. Page 81.
TNC
Menu #46: function=main/sub band: internal TNC. Selections=main/sub.
Default=sub. Ref. Page. 50.
Menu #47: function=data transfer speed: internal TNC. Selections=1200/9600
bps. Default=1200 bps. Ref. Page 50/
Menu #48: function=DCD sensing band. Selections=TNC band/main
& sub. Default=TNC band. Ref . page 50.
Menu # 49: function=P.C.T. (Packet Cluster Tune) mode. Selections=press
sub to access the sub-menu. No default or ref. Page.
Menu #49A: function=packet cluster tune mode. Selections=manual/auto.
Default=manual. Ref. Page 53.
Menu #49B: function=packet cluster RX confirmation tone. Selections=off/morse/voice.
Default=morse. Ref. Page. 53.
Menu #50: function=packet configuration. Selections=press
sub to access the sub-menu. No default or ref. Page.
Menu #50A: function=packet filter bandwidth. Selections=off/on.
Default=off. Ref. Page 50.
Menu #50B: function=AF input level for packet. Selections
0 to 9 (in steps of 1) default=4. ref. Page 50.
Menu #50C: function=main band AF output level for packet operation.
Selections=0 to 9 (in steps of 1) default=4. ref. Page 50.
Menu #50D: function=sub band AF output level for packet operation.
Selections=0 to 9 (in steps of 1). Default=4. ref. Page 50.
Menu # 50E: function=main/sub band: external TNC. Selections=main/sub.
Default=main. Ref. Page. 50.
Menu # 50F: function=data transfer speed: external TNC. Selections=1200/9600
bps. Default=1200 bps. Ref. Page 50.
PF keys
Menu #51: function=PF key assignment. Selections=press but
to access the sub-menu. No default or ref. Page.
Menu #51A: function=front panel PF key. Selections=off/A.N./B.C./N.R./NB/ANT
1/2/1 MHz/CTRL/CALL/CLR/FINE/CH3/CH2/CH1/CW TUNE/M.IN/M>VFO/SCAN/A=B/VFO/M/A/B/TF-SET/SPLIT/Q.M.IN/Q
MR/DSP MONI/RX MONI/VOICE2/VOICE1/MENU 00-62. default=voice
1. ref. Page 77.
Menu #51B: function=microphone PF1 (PF) key. Selections=same
as 51A. default=a/b. ref. Page 77.
Menu #51C: function=microphone PF2 (MR) key. Selections=same
as 51A. default=split. Ref. Page 77.
Menu #51D: function=microphone PF3 (VFO) key. Selections=
same as 51A. default=VFO/M. ref. Page 77
Menu #51E: function=microphone PF4 (call) key. Selections=same
as 51A. default=RX Moni . ref. Page 77.
MasteR/ Slave operation
Menu #52: function=split frequency transfer in master/slave
operation.. Selections=off/on. Default=off. Ref. Page 80.
Menu #53: function=permit to write the transferred split frequencies
to the target VFOs. Selections=off/on. Default=off. Ref. Page
80.
TX Inhibit
Menu #54: function=TX inhibit. Selections=off/on. Default=off.
Ref. Page 41.
Packet
Menu #55: function=packet communication mode. Selections=off/on.
Default=off. Ref. Page 49.
Menu #56: function=COM port communication speed. Selections=4800/9600/19200/38400/57600
bps. Default=9600 bps. Ref. Page 93.
APO
Menu #57: function=APO (auto power on) function. Selections=off/60/120/180
minutes. Default=off. Ref. Page 72.
RC-2000 Configuration
Menu #58: function=RC-2000 font in easy operation mode. Selections=Font1/font2.
default=font1. ref. Page 98.
Menu #59: function=RC-2000 panel/TS-2000(x) dot-matrix display
contrast. Selections=1 to 16 (in steps of 1). Default=8. ref.
Page 75.
Menu #60: function=display mode for RC-2000. selections=negative/positive.
Default=positive. Ref. Page 98.
TS-2000 Repeater Functions (K-type Only)
Menu #61: function=repeater function. Selections=press sub
to access the sub-menu. No default or ref. Page.
Menu #61A: Repeater mode select. Selections=off/locked/cross.
Default=off. Ref. Page 88.
Menu #61B: function=repeater TX hold. Selections=off/on. Default=off.
Ref. Page 88
Menu #61C: function=remote control ID code. Selections=000
to 999. default=000. ref. Page 82.
Menu #61D: function=acknowledgement signal in external remote
control mode. Selections=off/on. Default=off. Ref. Page 82.
Menu #61E: function=external remote control. Selections=off/on.
Default=off. Ref. Page 82.
Sky Command II+ (K-type Only)
Menu #62C: function=sky command II + configuration. Selections=press
SUB to access the sub-menu. No default or ref. Page.
Menu #62A: function=commander callsign for Sky Command II
+. Selections=input a callsign for the commander. Default=no
call. Ref. Page 83.
Menu #62B: function=transporter callsign for Sky Command II
+. Selections=input a callsign for the transporter. Default=no
call. Ref. Page 83.
Menu #62C: function=Sky Command II + tone frequency. Selections=38
CTCSS tones. Default=88.5Hz. ref. Page 83.
Menu #62D: function=Sky Command II + communication speed.
Selections=1200/9600 bps. Default=1200 bps. Ref. Page 83.
Menu #62E: function=Sky Command II + mode. Selections=Off/client/command/T-porter.
Default=off. Ref. Page. 83.
Alphabetical function list
Amplifier:
Linear amplifier control delay for HF band; menu #28A
Linear amplifier control delay for 50 MHz band; menu # 28B
Linear amplifier control delay for 144 MHz band; menu #28C
Linear amplifier control delay for 430(440) MHz band; menu
#28D
Linear amplifier control relay for 1.2 GHz band; menu # 28E
Antenna:
Enable an input from the HF RX ANT connector; menu #18
Antenna Tuner:
In-line AT while receiving; menu #27
TX hold when AT completes the tuning; menu #26
Beep Function:
Beep output level; menu #12.
CW:
Auto CW TX in SSB mode; menu #36
Bug key mode; menu #35
CW keying dot, dash weight ratio; menu #33
CW rise time; menu#32
CW RX pitch/TX sidetone frequency; menu #31
Frequency correction for changing SSB to CW; menu #37
Keying priority over playback; menu #30
Reverse CW keying auto weight ratio; menu #34
Data Transfer:
Permit to write the transferred Split frequencies to the target
VFOs; menu #53
Split frequency transfer in master/ slave operation; menu
#52
DSP Filter:
DSP RX equalizer; menu #20
DSP TX equalizer; menu #21
DSP TX filter bandwidth for SSB or AM; menu #22
DTMF:
DTMF number memory select; menu #45A
Pause duration for stored DTMF number; menu #45C
TX speed for stored DTMF number; menu#45B
FM
Auto repeater offset; menu #43
Enable S-meter squelch for FM mode; menu #19A
Hang time for S-meter squelch; menu #19B
Mic gain for FM; menu #41
Sub-tone mode for FM; menu #42
TX hold: 1750 Hz tone; menu #44
FSK
FSK keying polarity; menu #39
FSK shift; menu #38
FSK tone frequency; menu #40
LCD:
Display brightness; menu #00
Key illumination; menu #01
RC-2000 panel/TS-2000(X) dot-matrix display contrast; menu
#59
Memory Function
Memory-VFO split operation; menu #06A
Tunable (ON) or fixed (OFF) memory channel frequencies; menu
#06B
Message playback:
Interval time for repeating the playback; menu #29B
Repeat the playback; menu #29A
PF Keys:
Front panel PF key; menu #51A
Microphone PF1 (PF) key; menu # 51B
Microphone PF2 (MR) key; menu # 51C
Microphone PF3 (VFO) key; menu #51D
Microphone PF4 (CALL) key; menu #51E
Power Control
Fine transmit power tuning; menu #23
Power on/off:
APO (Auto Power Off) function; menu #57
Remote Control:
Enable Mic remote control; menu #45D
Display mode for RC-2000; menu #60
RC-2000 font in easy operation mode; menu #58
RC-2000 panel/TS-2000(X) dot-matrix display contrast; menu
#59
Repeater:
Acknowledgement signal in external remote control mode; menu
#61D
External remote control; menu #61E
Remote control ID code; menu #61C
Repeater mode select; menu #61A
Repeater TX hold; menu #61B
Scan;
Program scan hold; menu #09
Program scan partially slowed; menu #07
Slow down frequency range for the Program scan; menu #08
Scan resume method; menu #10
Visual scan range; menu #11
Sky Command II+:
Commander callsign for Sky Command I1+; menu #62A
Sky Command I1+ communication speed; menu #62D
Sky Command I1+ mode; menu #62E
Sky Command I1+ tone frequency; menu #62C
Transporter callsign for Sky Command I1+; menu #62B
Speaker:
Audio output configuration for EXT.SP2 or headphone; menu
#16
Reverses the EXT.SP1 and EXT.SP2 (the headphone jack L/R
channels) audio outputs; menu #17
TNC:
AF input level for Packet; menu #50B
COM port communication speed; menu #56
Data transfer speed: External TNC; menu #50F
Data transfer speed: Internal TNC; menut #47
DCD sensing band; menu #48
Main band AF output level for packet operation; menu #50C
MAIN/SUB band: External TNC; menu #50C
MAIN/SUB band: Internal TNC; menu #46
Packet communication mode; menu #55
Packet filter bandwidth; menu #50A
Packet Cluster RX confirmation tone; menu #49B
Packet Cluster Tune mode; menu #49A
Sub band AF output level for packet operation; menu #50D
Transmission Control:
Time-out Timer; menu #24
TX inhibit; menu #54
Transverter:
Transverter frequency display; menu #25
Tuning Control:
Frequency correction for changing SSB to CW; menu #37
9 kHz frequency step size for the MULTI/CH control in AM mode
on the AM broadcast
band; menu # 05
Rounds off VFO frequencies changed by using the MULTI/CH control;
menu #04
Tuning control change per revolution; menu #02
Tuning with MULTI/CH control; menu #03
Volume Control:
Beep output level; menu #12
IDRU-3A playback volume; menu #14
ITX sidetone volume; menu #13
IVS-3 playback volume; menu #15
SSB TRANSMISSION
SSB is the most commonly-used mode on the HF Amateur bands.
Compared with other voice modes,
SSB requires only a narrow bandwidth for communications. SSB
also allows long distance
communications with minimum transmit power.
If necessary, refer to "OPERATING BASICS", beginning
on page 18, for details on how to receive.
1. Select an operating frequency.
2. Press [LSB/USB/AUTO] to select either lower or upper sideband
mode. "LSB" or "USB" appears to
show which sideband is selected.
3. Press [MIC/CAR] to activate the Microphone Gain Adjust.
The current gain level appears.
4. Press [SEND], or press and hold Mic [PTT]. The MAIN band
LED lights red. Refer to "VOX" {page 39}
for information on automatic TX/RX switching.
5. Speak into the microphone and adjust the MULTI/CH control
so that the ALC meter reflects
your voice level but does not exceed the ALC limit. Speak
in your normal tone and level of voice.
Speaking too close to the microphone or too loudly may increase
distortion and reduce
intelligibility at the receiving end. You may want to use
the Speech Processor.
Refer to "SPEECH PROCESSOR" {page 40} for details.
6. Press [SEND] or release Mic [PTT] to return to receive
mode. The MAIN band LED lights green or
turns off, depending on the MAIN SQL setting.
7. Press [MIC/CAR] to quit the Microphone Gain Adjust.
Refer to "COMMUNICATING AIDS", beginning on page
37, for information on additional useful
operation functions.
FM TRANSMISSION
FM is a common mode for communicating on VHF or UHF frequencies.
Many amateur radio operators use
their portable radios and mobile transceivers in FM mode.
You can also utilize repeaters to reach your
friends when they are outside your antenna coverage. Although
FM requires a wider bandwidth
when compared to SSB or AM mode, it has the finest audio quality
among these modes. When combined
with the full-quieting aspect of FM signals, which suppress
background noise on the frequency, FM can
be the best method for maintaining regular schedules with
your local friends.
If necessary, refer to "OPERATING BASICS", beginning
on page 18, for details on how to receive.
1. Select an operating frequency.
2. Press [FM/AM/NAR] to select FM mode. "FM" appears.
3. Press [SEND], or press and hold Mic [PTT]. The MAIN band
LED lights red.
Refer to "VOX" {page 39} for information on automatic
TX/RX switching.
4. Speak into the microphone in your normal tone and level
of voice. Speaking too close to the
microphone or too loudly may increase distortion and reduce
intelligibility at the receiving end.
You can switch the Microphone Gain for FM between "LOW",
"MID", and "HIGH" by using
Menu No. 41. "LOW" is usually appropriate; however,
select high if other stations report that
your modulation is weak. The MULTI/CH control has no effect
in FM mode.
5. Press [SEND] or release Mic [PTT] to return to receive
mode. The MAIN band LED lights green or
turns off, depending on the MAIN SQL setting.
Refer to "COMMUNICATING AIDS", beginning on page
37, for additional information on useful
operation functions.
AM TRANSMISSION
Each mode used on the HF Amateur bands has its own advantages.
Although long distance DX
contacts may be less common while using AM, the superior audio
quality characteristic of AM operation
is one reason why some hams prefer this mode. When looking
for others operating on AM, check the
following frequencies first: 3885 kHz, 7290 kHz, 14286 kHz,
21390 kHz, and 29000 ~ 29200 kHz
If necessary, refer to "OPERATING BASICS", beginning
on page 18, for details on how to receive.
1. Select an operating frequency.
2. Press [FM/ AM/ NAR] to select AM mode. "AM" appears.
3. Press [MIC/CAR] to activate the Microphone Gain Adjust.
The current gain level appears.
4. Press [SEND], or press and hold Mic [PTT]. The MAIN band
LED lights red. Refer to "VOX" {page 39}
for information on automatic TX/RX switching.
5. Speak into the microphone and adjust the MULTI/CH control
so that the calibrated power
meter slightly reflects your voice level. Speak in your normal
tone and level of voice.
Speaking too close to the microphone or too loudly may increase
distortion and reduce
intelligibility at the receiving end. You may want to use
the Speech Processor.
Refer to "SPEECH PROCESSOR" {page 40} for details.
6. Press [SEND] or release Mic [PTT] to return to receive
mode. The MAIN band LED lights green or
turns off, depending on the MAIN SQL setting.
7. Press [MIC/CAR] to quit the Microphone Gain Adjust.
Refer to "COMMUNICATING AIDS", beginning on page
37, for information on additional useful
operation functions.
Note: If necessary adjust the carrier level before speaking
into the
microphone. Press [FUNC], [MIC/ CAR] to enter the adjustment
mode. While transmitting only carrier signals, turn the MULTI/CH
control so that the ALC meter just begins to indicate. Press
[FUNC],
[MIC/ CAR] again to complete the adjustment.
NARROW BANDWIDTH FOR FM
When operating in FM mode, you can select wide or narrow
bandwidth operation. The table below shows
the RX IF filter bandwidth and TX deviation combination for
each operating mode. The
bandwidth selection is crucial to avoid audio distortion or
insufficient intelligibility that the
other station will encounter.
FM Wide RX IF filter Wide TX deviation
FMN Narrow 1 RX IF filter Narrow TX deviation
K-type: Main transceiver only.
All E-types: Main transceiver and sub-receiver.
Press [FM/ AM/ NAR] to select FM mode.
Press [FUNC], [FM/ AM/ NAR] to toggle the selection between
Wide and Narrow.
"FM" or "FMN" appears to indicate which
bandwidth is selected.
NARROW BANDWIDTH FOR AM
When receiving AM on the main transceiver, you can further
decrease the bandwidth to eliminate
interference. However, the TX deviation of AM is not affected
by this selection.
1. Press [FM/ AM/ NAR] to select AM mode on the main transceiver.
2. Press [FUNC], [FM/ AM/ NAR] to toggle the selection between
Normal and Narrow.
"AM" or "AMN" appears to indicate which
IF bandwidth is selected for the main transceiver.
7 BASIC COMMUNICATIONS
CW TRANSMISSION
CW operators know that this mode is very reliable when communicating
under worst conditions. It may
be true that newer digital modes rival CW as being equally
as useful in poor conditions. These modes,
however, do not have the long history of service nor the simplicity
that CW provides.
This transceiver has a built-in electronic keyer that supports
a variety of functions. For details on using
these functions, refer to "ELECTRONIC KEYER" {page
42}. If necessary, refer to "OPERATING BASICS",
beginning on page 18, for details on how to receive.
1. Select the operating frequency.
2. Press [CW/FSK/REV] to select CW mode. "CW" appears.
To precisely tune in another station, use Auto
Zero-beat. Refer to "AUTO ZERO-BEAT" {below}.
3. Press [SEND]. The IVIAIN band LED lights red. Refer to
"CW BREAK-IN" {page 42} for
information on automatic TX/RX switching.
4. Begin sending. As you transmit, you should hear a sidetone
that lets you monitor your own
transmission. Refer to "TX SIDETONE/RX PITCH FREQUENCY"
{below}.
5. Press [SEND] to return to receive mode. The MAIN band LED
lights green or turns off,
depending on the MAIN SQL setting.
Note: You may adjust the carrier level when necessary. Press
[FUNC], [MIC/ CAR] to enter the adjustment
mode. With the key down, turn the MULTI/ CH control so that
the ALC meter reads within
the ALC zone but does not exceed the upperALC zone limit.
Press [FUNC], [MIC/ CAR] again to complete
the adjustment.
AUTO ZERO-BEAT
Use Auto Zero-beat before transmitting to tune in a CW station.
Auto Zero-beat automatically and
exactly matches your transmit frequency with the station you
are receiving. Neglecting to do this
will reduce your chances of being heard by the other station.
1. Press [FUNC], [RIT/CW TUNE] to start Auto Zero-beat. "CW
TUNE" appears.
Your transmit frequency automatically changes so that the
pitch of the received signal exactly
matches the TX sidetone/RX pitch frequency that you have selected.
Refer to "TX
SIDETONE/RX PITCH FREQUENCY" {below}. When matching is
completed, "CW TUNE" disappears.
If matching is unsuccessful, the previous frequency is restored.
2. To quit Auto Zero-beat, press [FUNC], [RIT/CW TUNE] or
[CLR].
Note: You cannot start AutoZero-beat if you have selected
l.0k Hz or
wider for the DSP filter bandwidth. When using Auto Zero-beat,
the matching error is
within _+50 Hz in most cases. Auto Zero-beat may fail if the
keying speed of the target station is
too slow or when some interference is present.
When RIT function is ON, only RIT frequencies change to make
the Auto Zero-beat adjustment.
TX SIDETONE/RX PITCH FREQUENCY
As you send CW, you will hear tones from the
transceiver speaker. These are called transmit (TX)
sidetones. Listening to these tones, you can monitor
what you are transmitting. You may also use the
tones to ensure that your key contacts are closing,
the keyer is functioning, or to practice sending without
actually putting a signal on the air.
Receive pitch refers to the frequency of CW that you
hear after tuning in a CW station.
On this transceiver, the frequency of the sidetone and
receive pitch are equal and selectable. Access Menu
No. 31 to select the frequency that is most
comfortable for you. The selectable range is from
400 Hz to 1000 Hz in steps of 50 Hz.
To change the volume of the TX sidetone, access
Menu No. 13. The selections range from 1 to 9 and
OFF.
Note: The position of the MAIN AF and SUB AF controls do
not
affect the volume of the TX sidetone.
SPLIT-FREQUENCY OPERATION
Usually you can communicate with other stations
using a single frequency for receiving and
transmitting. In this case, you select only one
frequency on either VFO A or VFO B. However, there
are cases where you must select one frequency for
receiving and a different frequency for transmitting.
This requires the use of two VFOs. This is referred to
as "split-frequency operation". One typical case
which requires this type of operation is when you use
an FM repeater {page 32}. Another typical case is
when you call a rare DX station.
When a rare or desirable DX station is heard, that
operator may immediately get many simultaneous
responses. Often, such a station is lost under the
noise and confusion of many calling stations. If you
find that you are suddenly being called by many
operators, it is your responsibility to control the
situation. You may announce that you will be "listening
up 5 (kHz, from your present transmit frequency)", or
"listening down between 5 and 10 (kHz)".
1. Press [MAIN], [A/B] to select VFO A or VFO B on
the main transceiver. "< A" or "< B"
appears to show which VFO is
selected.
2. Select an operating frequency. The frequency selected at
this point will be
used for transmitting. To copy the selected VFO frequency
to the
other VFO, press [A=B].
3. Press [A/B] to select the other VFO.
4. Select an operating frequency. • The frequency selected
on this VFO will be
used for receiving.
5. Press [SPLIT]. "SPLIT" appears. Each press of
[A/B] reverses the receive and
transmit frequencies.
6. To quit split-frequency operation, press [SPLIT] again.
"SPLIT" disappears.
If you access Menu No. 06A and select "ON", you
can
recall a memory channel to use for either receiving or
transmitting. For more information, refer to "Memory-
VFO Split Operation" {page 60} under "MEMORY
FEATURES".
Note: You cannot perform SPLIT operation on the sub-receiver;
it
has only one VFO.
TF-SET (TRANSMIT FREQUENCY SET)
TF-SET allows you to temporarily switch your transmit
frequency and receive frequency. Canceling this
function immediately restores the original transmit and
receive frequencies. By activating TF-SET, you can
listen on your transmit frequency, and change it while
listening. This allows you to check whether or not the
newly selected transmit frequency is free of
interference.
1. Configure split-frequency operation as explained
in the previous section.
2. Press and hold [TF-SET].
3. While holding down [TF-SET], change the
operating frequency by turning the Tuning control
or by pressing Mic [UP]/[DWN]. The transceiver receives on
the frequency that
you select, but the frequency shown on the sub-display stays
unchanged.
4. Release [TF-SET]. You are now receiving again on your original
receive frequency.
Successfully contacting a DX station in a pileup often
depends on making a well-timed call on a clear
frequency. That is, it is important to select a relatively
clear transmit frequency and to transmit at the exact
instant when the DX station is listening but the
majority of the group aren't transmitting. Switch your
receive and transmit frequencies by using TF-SET
and listen. You will soon learn the rhythm of the DX
station and the pileup. The more proficient you
become at using this function, the more DX stations
you will contact.
Note: If you press [FUNC], [ATT/F LOCK] to lock the operating
frequency before using TF-SET, pressing an incorrect button
by
mistake retains the original receive frequency.
TF-SET is disabled while transmitting.
If you have recalled a memory channel (excluding CH 290 to
299), you cannot change the recalled frequency using the
Tuning control
To enable the Tuning control, access Menu No. 06B and select
"ON". Pressing Mic [UP]/ [DWN] after recalling a
memory
channel changes the memory channels.
An RIT frequency shift is not added; however, an XIT frequency
shift is added to the transmit frequency.
8 ENHANCED COMMUNICATIONS
FM REPEATER OPERATION
When using FM mode, you may access a repeater to
enjoy long distance communications. Repeaters,
which are often installed and maintained by radio
clubs, are usually located on mountain tops or other
elevated locations. Generally they operate at higher
ERP (Effective Radiated Power) than a typical
station. This combination of elevation and high ERP
allows communications in FM over much greater
distances than FM communications without using
repeaters.
Most repeaters use a receive and transmit frequency
pair with an offset. In addition, some repeaters must
receive a tone from the transceiver before it allows
access. Repeaters are available on the 29, 50, 144,
430 (440) MHz, and 1.2 GHz bands (TS-2000/
TS-B2000 Optional). For further information,
including repeater frequencies, consult your local
repeater reference.
This transceiver provides the following three methods
for programming two separate frequencies:
Using the Split-Frequency function {page 31}
Programming an offset (29, 50, 144, 430 (440) MHz
and 1.2 GHz bands)
Storing in a Split-Frequency channel {page 59}
Note: When programming two separate frequencies using two
VFOs,
be sure to select FM mode on both VFOs.
When operating through a repeater, over deviation caused
by
speaking too loudly into the microphone can cause your signal
to
'alk-off" (break up) through the repeater.
PROGRAMMING AN OFFSET
When using the 29, 50, 144, 430 (440) MHz or 1.2 GHz
band (TS-2000/TS-B2000 Optional), selecting a single
frequency and an offset is another method for
programming two separate frequencies. Unlike the
Split-Frequency function, this method requires only a
single VFO.
Note: If you store offset settings in a memory channel, you
need not
reprogram each time. Refer to "MEMORY FEATURES"
{page 58}.
Selecting an Offset Direction
1. Select a receive frequency.
2. Press [0/SHIFT/OFFSET] to switch the offset
direction. Select whether the transmit frequency will
be higher (+) or lower (-) than the receive
frequency. "+" or "-" appears to indicate
which offset
direction is selected.
To program the-7.6 MHz (430 MHz) or
-6.0 MHz (1.2 GHz) offset on all E-types,
repeatedly press [0/SHIFT/OFFSET] until
"=" appears.
If the offset transmit frequency falls outside the
allowable range, transmitting is inhibited. Use one
of the following methods to bring the transmit
frequency within the band limits:
Move the receive frequency further inside the band.
Change the offset direction.
Note: You can only change the offset direction while in FM
mode.
While using an odd-split memory channel for transmitting,
you cannot change the offset direction.
Selecting an Offset Frequency
To access a repeater which requires an odd-split
frequency pair, change the offset frequency from
the default which is used by most repeaters. The
default offset frequencies are as follows.
Band: 144 MHz K-type & all E-types: +-600 kHzHz
Band: 430 (440) MHz K-type: +-5.0MHz All E-types: +-1.6 MHz
-7.6 MHz
Band: 1.2 GHz K-type: +-12.0 MHz All E-types: +-35.0 MHz -6.0
MHz
As for the 29 and 50 MHz bands, the default offset
is set to 0 MHz (Simplex). Program the desired
offset frequency for these bands.
1. Press [FUNC], [0/SHIFT/OFFSET].
2. Turn the MULTI/CH control to select the appropriate offset
frequency.
The selectable range is from 0.00 MHz to 59.95 MHz in steps
of 50 kHz.
3. Press [FUNC], [0/SHIFT/OFFSET] again to complete the setting.
All E-types only: If you have selected "=" for the
offset
direction, you cannot change the default (-7.6 MHz or -6.0
MHz).
TRANSMITTING A TONE
Some FM repeaters require the transceiver to
transmit a sub-audible tone to prevent other
repeaters on the same frequency from locking each
other up. The required tone frequency differs among
repeaters. Repeaters also differ in their requirements
for either continuous or burst tones. For the
appropriate selections for your accessible repeaters,
consult your local repeater reference.
After completing the tone settings, pressing [SEND]
or pressing and holding Mic [PTT] causes the
transceiver to transmit the selected tone. If you have
selected a 1750 Hz tone, press [4/TONE/SEL] to
transmit the tone without pressing [PTT].
Note: If you store tone settings in a memory channel, you
need not
reprogram each time. Refer to "MEMORY FEATURES"
{page 58}.
Activating the Tone Function
1. Confirm that FM mode has been selected on
the VFO(s). When using two VFOs, you must select FM
mode on both VFOs.
2. Press [4/TONE/SEL.] to switch the Tone
function ON (or OFF). "T" appears when the function
is ON.
Note: You cannot use the Tone function with the CTCSS or
DCS
functions.
You need to activate the Tone function only when selecting
one of the 38 standard frequencies. The selection you make
here will not affect the transmission of the 1750 Hz tone.
Selecting a Tone Frequency
1. Press [FUNC], [4/TONE/SEL]. The current tone frequency
appears. The
default is 88.5 Hz.
2. Turn the MULTI/CH control to select the appropriate tone
frequency.
The available tone frequencies are listed in the following
table.
3. Press [FUNC], [4/TONE/SEL] to complete the setting.
8 ENHANCED COMMUNICATIONS
#01 Freq. (Hz)=67.0
#02 Freq. (Hz)=71.9
#03 Freq. (Hz)=74.4
#04 Freq. (Hz)=77.0
#05 Freq. (Hz)=79.7
#06 Freq. (Hz)=82.5
#07 Freq. (Hz)=85.4
#08 Freq. (Hz)=88.5
#09 Freq. (Hz)=91.5
#10 Freq. (Hz)=94.8
#11 Freq. (Hz)=97.4
#12 Freq. (Hz)=100.0
#13 Freq. (Hz)=103.5
#14 Freq. (Hz)=107.2
#15 Freq. (Hz)=110.9
#16 Freq. (Hz)=114.8
#17 Freq. (Hz)=118.8
#18 Freq. (Hz)=123.0
#19 Freq. (Hz)=127.3
#20 Freq. (Hz)=131.8
#21 Freq. (Hz)=136.5
#22 Freq. (Hz)=141.3
#23 Freq. (Hz)=146.2
#24 Freq. (Hz)=151.4
#25 Freq. (Hz)=156.7
#26 Freq. (Hz)=162.2
#27 Freq. (Hz)=167.9
#28 Freq. (Hz)=173.8
#29 Freq. (Hz)=179.9
#30 Freq. (Hz)=186.2
#31 Freq. (Hz)=192.8
#32 Freq. (Hz)=203.5
#33 Freq. (Hz)=210.7
#34 Freq. (Hz)=218.1
#35 Freq. (Hz)=225.7
#36 Freq. (Hz)=233.6
#37 Freq. (Hz)=241.8
#38 Freq. (Hz)=250.3
#39 Freq. (Hz)=1750
Note: Use Nos. 01 to 39 shown in the table above when selecting
tone frequencies via Wireless Remote Control {page 82}.
You can select a tone frequency independent of a CTCSS
frequency.
Selecting Continuous or Burst
Access Menu No. 42 to select "Continuous" or
"Burst". With Continuous selected, the transceiver
sends the tone continuously during the
transmission. With Burst selected, the transceiver
sends a 500 ms tone each time transmission
starts. When using the 144, 430 (440) MHz, or
1.2 GHz band, continuous tones are always
transmitted, regardless of the selection.
Transmitting a 1750 Hz Tone
Most repeaters in Europe require transceivers to
transmit a 1750 Hz tone. With 1750 Hz tone
selected, pressing [4/TONE/SEL] causes the
transceiver to transmit the 1750 Hz tone.
Releasing the key ceases transmission of the
code. Some repeaters in Europe must receive
continuous signals for a certain period of time,
following a 1750 Hz tone. This transceiver is
capable of remaining in transmit mode for
2 seconds after transmitting the 1750 Hz tone.
Access Menu No. 44 and select "ON".
8 ENHANCED COMMUNICATIONS
AUTOMATIC REPEATER OFFSET
This function automatically selects an offset direction,
according to the frequency that you select on the
144 MHz band. The transceiver is programmed for
offset directions as shown below. To obtain an up-to-
date band plan for repeater offset direction, contact
your national Amateur Radio association.
Access Menu No. 43 and switch the function ON or
OFE The default is ON.
K-type (U.S.A. and Canada versions)
This complies with the standard ARRL band plan.
S: Simplex
All E-types (European versions)
Note: Automatic Repeater Offset does not function when Reverse
is
ON. However, pressing [TF-SET] after Automatic Repeater
Offset has selected an offset (split) status, exchanges the
receive
and transmit frequencies.
If you change the offset direction by pressing [0/SHIFT/
OFFSET] when Automatic Repeater Offset is ON, the Shift
direction on the above figure is applied when you change the
frequencies.
REVERSE FUNCTION
After programming an offset on the 29, 50, 144,
430 (440) MHz, and 1.2 GHz (Optional) band, the
reverse function exchanges a separate receive and
transmit frequency. So, while using a repeater, you
can manually check the strength of a signal that you
receive directly from the other station. If the station's
signal is strong, both stations should move to a
simplex frequency to free up the repeater.
Press [TF-SET] to switch the Reverse function ON
(or OFF) while the Shift function is active.
"R" appears when the Reverse function is ON.
Note: If you press [TF-SET] and try to transmit outside the
available
transmission frequency, the transceiver will become inhibited
and
you cannot transmit.
If you press [TF-SET] and try to receive outside the available
receive frequency, the transceiver will not a/low you to tune
the
frequency, The Reverse function will not operate.
Automatic Repeater Offset does not function while Reverse
is ON.
You cannot switch Reverse ON or OFF while transmitting.
AUTOMATIC SIMPLEX CHECK (ASC)
ASC functions only when you have programmed an
offset on the 29, 50, 144, 430 (440) MHz or 1.2 GHz
(Optional) band. While using a repeater, ASC
periodically monitors the strength of a signal that you
receive directly from the other station. If the station's
signal is strong enough to allow direct contact without
a repeater, the ASC indicator on the display starts to
blink.
Press and hold [TF-SET] for approximately 1 second
to switch the function ON.
The "[R]" indicator appears when the function is
ON.
When direct contact is possible, the "[R]" indicator
blinks.
To quit the function, press [TF-SET].
Note: Pressing Mic [PTT] causes the ASC indicator to stop
blinking.
ASC does not function if your transmit and receive frequencies
are the same (simplex operation). ASC does not function while
scanning.
Activating ASC while using Reverse switches Reverse OFF.
If you recall a memory channel or the Call channel that has
the
Reverse status ON, ASC is switched OFF. ASC causes received
audio to be
momentarily intermitted every 3 seconds.
TONE FREQ. ID SCAN
This function scans through all tone frequencies to
identify the incoming tone frequency on a received
signal. You can use this function to find which tone
frequency is required by your local repeater.
1. Press [FUNC], [4/TONE/SEL]. The current tone frequency
appears.
2. Press [SCAN/SG.SEL] to activate the Tone Freq. ID.
"T" blinks and every Tone frequency is scanned.
When the Tone frequency is
identified, the transceiver stops scanning and the identified
frequency is displayed.
Press [SCAN/SG.SEL] again to resume scanning. Press [SCAN/SG.SEL]
to stop scanning while
the Tone frequency ID scan is active.
FM CTCSS OPERATION
You may sometimes want to hear calls only from
specific persons. When using FM mode, the
Continuous Tone Coded Squelch System (CTCSS)
allows you to ignore (not hear) unwanted calls from
other persons who are using the same frequency. A
CTCSS tone is sub-audible and is selectable from
among the 38 standard tone frequencies. Select the
same CTCSS tone as the other stations in your
group. You will not hear calls from stations other than
those using the same CTCSS tone.
Note: CTCSS does not cause your conversation to be private.
It
only relieves you from listening to unwanted conversations.
1. Press [A/B] to select VFO A or VFO B. "4 A"
or "4 B appears to show which VFO is
selected.
2. Select a band.
3. Select an operating frequency.
4. Press [FM/ AM/ NAR] to select FM mode. "FM" appears.
5. Turn the SQL control to adjust the squelch.
6. Press [6/CTCSS/SEL] to switch the CTCSS function ON (or
OFF). "CT" appears when the function is on.
7. Press [FUNC], [6/CTCSS/SEL.]. The current CTCSS frequency
appears. The
default CTCSS frequency is 88.5 Hz.
8. Turn the MULTI/CH control to select the appropriate CTCSS
frequency.
The selectable CTCSS frequencies are listed in the following
table.
9. Press [FUNC], [6/CTCSS/SEL] to complete the setting.
8 ENHANCED COMMUNICATIONS
01
67.0
11
97.4
21
136.5
31
192.8
02
71.9
12
100.0
22
141.3
32
203.5
03
74.4
13
103.5
23
146.2
33
210.7
04
77.0
14
107.2
24
151.4
34
218.1
05
79.7
15
110.9
25
156.7
35
225.7
06
82.5
16
114.8
26
162.2
36
233.6
07
85.4
17
118.8
27
167.9
37
241.8
08
88.5
18
123.0
28
173.8
38
250.3
09
91.5
19
127.3
29
179.9
10
94.8
20
131.8
30
186.2
You will hear calls only when the selected tone is
received. To answer the call, press [SEND] or press
and hold Mic [PTT], then speak into the microphone.
Skip steps 7 and 8 if you have already programmed
the appropriate CTCSS frequency.
Note: When using split-frequency operation, select FM mode
on both
VFOs to use CTCSS. Use Nos. 01 to 38 shown in the table above
when selecting
CTCSS frequencies via Wireless Remote Control {page 82}.
You can select a CTCSS frequency independent of a tone
frequency. You cannot use the CTCSS function with the Tone
or DCS
functions.
CTCSS FREQ. ID SCAN
This function scans through all CTCSS frequencies to
identify the incoming CTCSS frequency on a received
signal. You may find this useful when you cannot
recall the CTCSS frequency that the other persons in
your group are using.
1. Press [FUNC], [6/CTCSS/SEL]. The current CTCSS frequency
appears.
2. Press [SCAN/SG.SEL] to activate the CTCSS Freq. ID scan.
"C T" blinks and every CTCSS tone frequency is scanned.
When the CTCSS frequency is
identified, the transceiver stops scanning and the identified
frequency is displayed.
Press [SCAN/SG.SEL] again to resume scanning. Press [SCAN/SG.SEL]
to stop scanning while
the CTCSS tone frequency ID scan is active.
Note: Received signals are audible while scanning is in progress.
8 ENHANCED COMMUNICATIONS
FM DCS OPERATION
Digital Code Squelch (DCS) is another FM application
which allows you to ignore (not hear) unwanted calls.
It functions the same way as CTCSS. The only
differences are the encode/decode method and the
number of selectable codes. For DCS, you can select
from 104 different codes listed in the table below.
1. Press [A/B] to select VFO A or VFO B. " A" or
" B" appears to show which VFO is
selected.
2. Select a band.
3. Select an operating frequency.
4. Press [FM/AM/NAR] to select FM mode. "FM" appears.
5. Turn the SQL control to adjust the squelch.
6. Press [o/DCS/SEL] to switch the DCS function ON (or OFF).
"DCS" appears when the function
is ON. PRE DCS Press [FUNC], [o/DCS/SEL]. The current DCS
code appears. The default is 23.
Turn the MULl'I/CH control to select the appropriate DCS code.
The available DCS codes are listed
in the following table.
023, 025, 026,031, 032, 036, 043, 047, 051, 053, 054, 065,
071, 072,073. 074, 114,115
116, 122, 125, 131, 132, 134, 143, 145, 152, 155,156, 162,
165, 172, 174,205, 212, 223/
225, 226, 243,244, 245. 246, 251, 252, 255, 261, 263, 265,
266, 271, 274, 206, 311, 315, 325, 331, 332, 343, 346,, 351,
356, 364, 365, 371, 411, 412, 413, 413, 423, 431, 432, 445,
446, 452, 454, 455, 462, 464, 465, 466, 503, 506, 516, 523,
526, 532, 546, 565, 606, 612, 624, 627, 631, 632, 654, 662,
664, 703, 712, 723, 731, 732, 734, 743, 754,
Press [FUNC], [°/DCS/SEL] again to complete the setting.
You will hear calls only when the selected code is
received. To answer the call, press [SEND] or press
and hold Mic [PTT], then speak into the microphone.
Skip steps 7 to 9 if you have already programmed the
appropriate DCS code.
Note: You cannot use DCS with the Tone or CTCSS functions.
DCS CODE ID SCAN
This function scans through all DCS codes to identify
the incoming DCS code on a received signal. You
may find this useful when you cannot recall the DCS
code that the other persons in your group are using.
1. Press [FUNC], [o/DCS/SEL]. The current DCS code appears.
2. Press [SCAN/SG.SEL] to activate the DCS Code ID scan. "DCS"
blinks and every DCS code is scanned.
When the DCS code is identified, the transceiver stops scanning
and the identified
DCS ID is displayed. Press [SCAN/SG.SEL] to resume scanning.
Press [SCAN/SG.SEL] to stop scanning while
the DCS code ID scan is active.
Note: Received signals are audible while scanning is in progress.
Communicating Aids
RECEIVING
SELECTING YOUR FREQUENCY
In addition to turning the Tuning control or pressing
Mic [UP]/[DWN], there are several other ways to
select your frequency. This section describes
additional methods of frequency selection that may
save you time and effort.
Direct Frequency Entry
When the desired frequency is far removed from
the current frequency, directly entering a
frequency from the numeric keypad is usually the
fastest method.
1. Press [ENT]. "- ......."appears.
2. Press the numeric keys ([0] to [9]) to enter your desired
frequency.
Pressing [ENT] fills the remaining digits (the digits you
did not enter) with 0 and
completes the entry. To select 1.85 MHz for example, press
[0],
[0], [0], [1], [8], [5], then press [ENT] to complete the
input (7 key strokes).
To shorten the key strokes, you can also use [dot] as MHz.
Press [1], [dot] (MHz), [8],
[5], then press [ENT] to complete the input (5 key strokes).
Pressing [CLR] cancels the entry and restores the current
VFO frequency.
Note: You can enter the frequency in the range of 30.00 kHz
to
1299.99999 MHz. Refer to the specifications for the
available frequency range. Attempting to enter a frequency
that is outside the
selectable frequency range causes an alarm to sound. The entered
frequency is rejected.
When the entered frequency does not meet the current VFO frequency
step size requirement, the nearest
available frequency is automatically selected (Sub-receiver).
The nearest available frequency is
automatically selected after the entered frequency is changed
(Main transceiver).
When the 10 Hz digit (last displayed digit) is entered, the
digit 0 is automatically entered for the
1 Hz digit, and frequency entry is completed. The 1 Hz digit
is not displayed.
When an entered frequency is accepted, RIT or XIT will be
switched OFF, but the RIT or XIT offset
frequency is not cleared. After recalling memory channels
290 to 299 that have
Start and End frequencies stored, the receive frequency can
be changed by using Direct Frequency
Entry within the programmed range.
Using I MHz Steps
Pressing [+]/[-] on the front panel changes
Amateur bands. You can also use the MULTI/CH
control to change the operating frequency in steps
of 1 MHz.
1. Press [1MHz/SEL]. "MHz" appears.
2. 2 Turn the MULTI/CH control. Clockwise increases the frequency,
counter-
clockwise decreases the frequency.
3. Press [1MHz/SEL] to exit the function. "MHz"
disappears.
If you prefer to change the frequency in steps of
100 kHz or 500 kHz steps rather than 1 MHz, press
[FUNC], [1MHz/SEL] then turn the MULTI/CH
control to select 100 kHz or 500 kHz.
Note: Even if 100 kHz or 500 kHz is selected for the [1MHz/
SEL]
key, the MHz icon appears.
Quick QSY
To move up or down the frequency quickly, use the
MULTI/CH control. Turning this control changes
the operating frequency in steps of. 5 kHz for SSB/
CW/FSK and 10 kHz for FM/AM (below 60 MHz).
If you want to change the default frequency
step size, press [FUNC], [91 FINE/STEP].
Select 5 kHz, 6.25 kHz, 10 kHz, 12.5 kHz,
15 kHz, 20 kHz, 25 kHz, 30 kHz, 50 kHz or
100 kHz for FM/AM, and 1 kHz, 2.5 kHz,
5 kHz, or 10 kHz for the other modes. The
default step size is 5 kHz for SSB/CW/FSK/
AM and 10 kHz for FM (below 60 MHz).
When changing the operating frequency by
using the MULTI/CH control, frequencies are
rounded such that new frequencies are
multiples of the frequency step size. To cancel
this function, access Menu No. 04 and select
OFF (default is ON).
Within the AM broadcast band, the step size
automatically defaults to the frequency step
value in Menu No. 05. This step size can be
switched between 9 kHz (all E-types: ON) and
5 kHz (K-type: OFF) via Menu No. 05.
Note: The programmed frequency step size for the MULTI/CH
control is stored independently for the HF/ 50 MHz, 144 MHz,
430 (440) MHz and 1.2 GHz bands (Main transceiver). You can
also set a different frequency step size for SSB, CW, FSK,
AM
and FM modes. The sub-receiver also stores the independent
frequency step size for 118 MHz (K-type only), 144 MHz,
300MHz (K-type only), and 430 (440) MHz bands. You can also
set a different frequency step size for FM and AM.
9 COMMUNICATING AIDS
Fine Tuning
The default step value when turning the Tuning
control to change the frequency is 10 Hz for SSB,
CW, and FSK modes, and 100 Hz for FM and AM
Modes. However, you can change the step size to
1 Hz for SSB, CW, and FSK modes, and 10 Hz for
FM & AM modes.
1. Press [91FINE/STEP]. • "FINE" appears.
2. Turn the Tuning control to select the exact frequency.
3. To quit the function, press [9/FINE/STEP] again.
"FINE" disappears.
Note: Fine Tuning works only on the main transceiver.
If Menu No. 03 is ON, you cannot perform fine tuning in FM
mode for all bands and AM mode for the 144 MHz/
430 (440) MHz/1.2 GHz (TS-2000 optional) bands.
Equalizing VF0 Frequencies (A=B)
This function allows you to copy the frequency and
modulation mode of the active VFO to the inactive
VFO.
1. Select the frequency and mode on VFO A or VFO B.
2. Press [A=B]. The frequency and mode selected in step 1
are copied to the inactive VFO.
3. Press [A/B] to confirm that the frequency was
copied. Equalizing VF0 Frequencies (A=B)
This function allows you to copy the frequency and
modulation mode of the active VFO to the inactive
VFO.
1. Select the frequency and mode on VFO A or VFO B.
2. 2 Press [A=B]. The frequency and mode selected in step
1
are copied to the inactive VFO.
3. Press [A/B] to confirm that the frequency was copied.
RIT (RECEIVE INCREMENTAL TUNING)
RIT provides the ability to change your receive
frequency by +20.00 kHz in steps of 10 Hz without
changing your transmit frequency. If the Fine Tuning
([9/FINE/STEP]) function is ON, the step size
becomes 1 Hz. RIT works equally well with all
modulation modes and while using VFO or Memory
Recall mode.
1. Press [RIT/CW TUNE]. "RIT" and the RIT offset
appear.
2. If required, press [CLEAR] to reset the RIT offset to 0.
3. Turn the RIT/SUB control to change your receive frequency.
4. To turn off RIT, press [RIT/CW Tune]. The receive frequency
is returned to the
frequency that was selected prior to Step 1.
Note: RIT works only on the main transceiver.
When storing the frequency in a Memory channel with RIT
function ON, RIT offset frequency is added or subtracted to/from
the VFO frequency. Then the calculated data is stored in the
Memory channel.
AGC (AUTOMATIC GAIN CONTROL)
When using a mode other than FM, AGC selects the
time constant for the automatic gain control circuit.
Selecting a slow time constant will cause the receiver
gain and S-meter readings to react slowly to large
input changes. A fast time constant causes the
receiver gain and the S-meter to react quickly to
changes in the input signal. A fast AGC setting is
particularly useful in the following situations:
Tuning rapidly
Receiving weak signals
Receiving high-speed CW
Unlike other transceivers, the TS-2000's digital AGC
circuit allows you to adjust the time constant from
slow to fast in 20 steps, where 1 is the slowest and
20 is the fastest. Furthermore, you can switch the
AGC OFF if you desire.
For your convenience, the following default AGC time
constant has already been programmed.
SSB: Level 7 S,..._F CW: Level 12 S…….F
FSK: Level 14 S…. AM; Level 5 S….F
To change the default time constant:
1. Press [8/AGC/OFF]. The AGC time constant scale appears
on the
sub dot-matrix display.
2. To select a slower time constant, turn the
MULTI/CH control counterclockwise. The bar
indicator moves from F(ast) to S(low). To select
a faster time constant, turn the MULTI/CH
control clockwise. The bar indicator moves from
S(low) to F(ast).
3. If you want to turn the AGC OFF, press [FUNC],
[81 AGC/OFF].
Note: You cannot adjust the AGC time constant on the sub-receiver.
TRANSMITTING
VOX (VOICE-OPERATED TRANSMIT)
VOX eliminates the necessity of manually switching
to the transmit mode each time you want to transmit.
The transceiver automatically switches to transmit
mode when the VOX circuitry senses that you have
begun speaking into the microphone.
When using VOX, develop the habit of pausing
between thoughts to allow the transceiver to drop
back to receive mode briefly. You will then hear if
anybody wants to interrupt, plus you will have a short
period to gather your thoughts before speaking again.
Your listeners will appreciate your consideration as
well as respect your more articulate conversation.
VOX can be switched ON and OFF independently for
CW and the other modes, excluding FSK.
Press [VOX/LEVEL] to toggle VOX ON and OFE The VOX LED lights.
Microphone Input Level
To enjoy the VOX function, take the time to
properly adjust the gain of the VOX circuit. This
level controls the capability of the VOX circuit to
detect the presence or absence of your voice. In
CW mode, this level cannot be adjusted.
1. Select USB, LSB, FM, or AM mode.
2. Press [VOX/LEVEL] to switch the VOX function ON. The VOX
LED lights.
3. Press [FUNC], [VOX/LEVEL]. The current VOX gain appears
on the sub
dot-matrix display.
4. While speaking into the microphone using your
normal tone of voice, adjust the setting (default
is 4) using the MULTI/CH control until the
transceiver reliably switches to transmit mode
each time you speak.
The selectable gain range is from 0 to 9.
The setting should not allow background
noise to switch the transceiver to transmit
mode.
Note: The VOX gain level can be adjusted even if VOX is
switched OFF or while you are transmitting.
Delay Time
If the transceiver returns to receive mode too
quickly after you stop speaking, your final word
may not be transmitted. To avoid this, select an
appropriate delay time that allows all of your
words to be transmitted without an overly long
delay after you stop speaking.
1. Select USB, LSB, FM, or AM mode.
2. Press [VOX/LEVEL] to switch the VOX function ON.
3. Press [FUNC], [KEY/DELAY].
The current setting appears on the sub dot-
matrix display. The default is 50.
4. While speaking into the microphone using your
normal tone of voice, adjust the MULTI/CH
control such that the transceiver switches to
receive mode after you have stopped talking.
The selectable range is from 5 to 100
(150 ms to 3000 ms) in steps of 5, or OFF.
5. Press [FUNC], [KEY/DELAY] to set the VOX delay.9
COMMUNICATING AIDS
SPEECH PROCESSOR
The Speech Processor levels out large fluctuations in
your voice while you speak. When using SSB, FM, or
AM mode, this leveling action effectively raises the
average transmit output power, resulting in a more
understandable signal. The amount of voice
compression is fully adjustable. You will notice that
using the Speech Processor makes it easier to be
heard by distant stations.
1. Select USB, LSB, FM, or AM mode.
2. Press [PROC/LEVEL] to switch the Speech Processor ON.
The PROC LED lights.
3. Press [FUNC], [PROC/LEVEL] to enter the
Speech Processor input level adjustment mode.
4. As you speak into the microphone, turn the
MULTI/CH control so that the compression
meter indicates that the compression level is
around 10 dB while you speak. Using higher compression
will not improve your signal clarity or apparent signal strength.
Excessively compressed signals are more
difficult to understand due to distortion and are
less pleasant to hear than signals with less
compression.
5. Press [FUNC], [PROC/LEVEL] to exit the Speech
Processor input level adjustment.
6. Press [MIC/CAR] to enter the Speech processor
output level Adjustment.
As you speak into the microphone, turn the
MULTI/CH control so that the ALC meter
reflects according to your voice level but does
not exceed the ALC limit. Press [MIC/CAR] to
exit when you finish the adjustment.
XIT (TRANSMIT INCREMENTAL TUNING)
Similar to RIT, XIT provides the ability to change your
transmit frequency by +20.00 kHz in steps of 10 Hz
without changing your receive frequency. If the Fine
Tuning function is ON, the step size is 1 Hz.
1. Press [XlT/ALT]. "XlT" and the XIT offset appear.
2. If required, press [CLEAR] to reset the XIT offset to 0.
3. Turn the RIT/SUB control to change your transmit
frequency.
4. To turn XIT OFF, press [XlT/ALT].
The transmit frequency is returned to the
frequency that was selected prior to step 1.
Note: XIT works only on the main transceiver.
The frequency shift set by the RIT/SUB control is also used
by
the RIT function. Therefore, changing or clearing the XlT
offset
also affects the RIT offset.
When the XlT frequency exceeds the limit of available
transmission frequency, the transceiver automatically stops
transmitting.
CUSTOMIZING TRANSMIT SIGNAL
CHARACTERISTICS
The quality of your transmitted signal is important,
regardless of which on-air activity you pursue.
However, it is easy to be casual and overlook this fact
since you don't listen to your own signal. The
following sub-sections provide information that will
help you tailor your transmitted signal.
TX Filter Bandwidth (SSB/AM)
Use Menu No. 22 to select one of the following
transmit bandwidths: 2.0 kHz, 2.2 kHz, 2.4 kHz
(default), 2.6 kHz, 2.8 kHz, or 3.0 kHz.
Bandwidth 2.0 kHz=passband frequency of 500~2500 Hz
Bandwidth 2.2 kHz=passband frequency of 400~2600 Hz
Bandwidth 2.4 kHz=passband frequency of 300~2700 Hz
Bandwidth 2.6 kHz=passband frequency of 200~2800 Hz
Bandwidth 2.8 kHz=passband frequency of 100~2900 Hz*
Bandwidth 3.0 kHz=passband frequency of 10~3000 Hz*
*If the Speech Processor is ON the low-cut filter is set
to 200 Hz
for 2.8kHz and 3.0kHz.
TX Equalizer (SSB/FM/AM)
Use Menu No. 21 to change the transmit frequency
characteristics of your signal. You can select from
one of six different transmit profiles including the
default flat response. Selecting any of the following
items from the Menu causes "EQT" to appear on
the display.
Off (OFF): The default frequency response for SSB, FM, and
AM.
High boost (H BOOST): Emphasizes higher audio frequencies;
effective
for a bassy voice.
Formant pass (F PASS): Improves clarity by suppressing audio
frequencies outside the normal voice frequency
range.
Bass boost (B BOOST): Emphasizes lower audio frequencies;
effective
for a voice with more high frequency components.
Conventional (CONVEN): Emphasizes by 3 dB frequencies at
600 Hz
and higher.
User (USER): Reserved for the optional ARCP software. Off
is programmed at the factory as a default.
Frequency Response Curves diagram
TRANSMIT INHIBIT
Transmit Inhibit prevents the transceiver from being
placed in transmit mode. No signal can be
transmitted and receiver audio is muted when this
function is ON even if the PTT or [SEND] is pressed.
TX Inhibit OFF: Transmission is allowed.
TX Inhibit ON: Transmission is not allowed.
Switch the function ON or OFF via Menu No. 54. The
default is OFF.
CHANGING FREQUENCY WHILE TRANSMITTING
Moving your frequency while transmitting is usually
an unwise practice due to the risk of interfering with
other stations. However, if necessary, by using the
Tuning control you can change the operating
frequency while transmitting. You also can change
the XIT offset frequency while in transmit mode.
While transmitting, if you select a frequency outside
the transmit frequency range, the transceiver is
automatically forced to receive mode. If you selected
transmit mode by pressing [SEND], transmission will
not resume until you select a frequency inside the
transmit frequency range, at which time you must
press [SEND] again.
CW BREAK-IN
Break-in allows you to transmit CW without manually
switching between transmit and receive modes. Two
types of Break-ins are available: Semi Break-in and
Full Break-in.
Semi break-in: When the key contacts open, the transceiver
automatically waits for the passage of the time period
that you have selected. The transceiver then returns
to receive mode.
Full Break-in: As soon as the key contacts open, the transceiver
returns to receive mode.
USING SEMI BREAK-IN OR FULL BREAK-IN
1. Press [CW/FSK/REV] to select CW mode. "CW" appears.
2. Press [VOX/LEVEL]. The VOX LED lights.
3. Press [FUNC], [KEW DELAY]. The current setting (Full or
delay time)
appears. The default is Full Break-in.
4. Turn the MULTI/CH control to select Full Break-in
or a delay time for Semi Break-in. Delay time ranges from
5 to 100 (50 ms to
1000 ms) in steps of 5.
5. Begin sending. The transceiver automatically switches to
transmit mode. When FBK (Full Break-in) is selected: The transceiver
immediately switches to
receive mode when the key opens. When a delay time is selected:
The transceiver switches to receive
mode after the delay time that you have selected has passed.
6. Press [FUNC], [KEW DELAY] again.
Note: Full Break-in cannot be used with the TL-922/922A linear
ELECTRONIC KEYER
This transceiver has a built-in electronic keyer that
can be used by connecting a keyer paddle to the
transceiver's rear panel. Refer to "Keys for CW
(PADDLE and KEY)" {page 3} for details regarding
this connection. The built-in keyer supports Iambic
operation.
CHANGING KEYING SPEED
The keying speed of the electronic keyer is fully
adjustable. Selecting the appropriate speed is
important in order to send error-free CW that other
operators can copy solidly. Selecting a speed that is
beyond your keying ability will only result in mistakes.
You will obtain the best results by selecting a speed
that is close to the speed used by the other station.
1. Press [CW/FSK/REV] to select CW mode. "CW" appears.
2. Press [KEY/DELAY]. The current keying speed appears. The
default
is 20 (WPM).
3. While keying the paddle and listening to the
transmit sidetone, turn the MULTI/CH control to
select the appropriate speed. The speeds range from 10 (WPM)
to 60 (WPM),
in steps of 1. The larger the number, the faster the speed.
4. Press [KEY/DELAY] again to complete the setting.
Note: When using the semi-automatic "Bug" function,
the selected
speed applies only to the rate that dots are sent.
AUTO WEIGHTING
The electronic keyer can automatically change the
dot/dash weighting. Weighting is the ratio of dash
length to dot length. The weighting changes with
your keying speed, thus making your keying easier
for other operators to copy.
Use Menu No. 33 to select AUTO, or 2.5 ~ 4.0 (in
steps of 0.1) fix weight ratio. The default is AUTO.
When the fix weight ratio is selected, the dot/dash
weight ratio is locked regardless of the keying speed.
Reverse Keying Weight Ratio
Auto Weighting increases the weighting as you
increase your keying speed. However, the
electronic keyer also can decrease the weighting
as you increase your keying speed.
To switch this function ON, access Menu No. 34,
and select ON. The default is OFF.
Reverse Keying Weight—OFF. Keying Speed (WPM) 10~25=1:2.5;
26~45=1:3.0; 46~60=1:3.2
Reverse Keying Weight-ON. Keying Speed 10~25=1:3.2; 26~45=1:3.0;
46~60=1:2.8.
BUG KEY FUNCTION
The built-in electronic keyer also can be used as a
semi-automatic key. Semi-automatic keys are also
known as "Bugs". When this function is ON, dots
are
generated in the normal manner by the electronic
keyer. Dashes, however, are manually generated by
the operator by holding the keyer paddle closed for
the appropriate length of time.
To switch this function ON, access Menu No. 35, and
select ON. The default is OFF.
Note: When the Bug Key function is ON, CW Message Memory
(see below) cannot be used.
CW MESSAGE MEMORY
This transceiver has three memory channels for
storing CW messages. Each memory channel can
store approximately 50 characters. These memory
channels are ideal for storing contest exchanges that
you want to send repeatedly. Stored messages can
be played back to check message content or for
transmitting.
The electronic keyer has a function that allows you
to interrupt playback and manually inject your own
keying. To switch this function ON, access Menu
No. 30, and select ON. The default is OFF.
The electronic keyer can also repeatedly play back
the message that you stored. To switch this function
ON, access Menu No. 29A and select ON. The
default is OFF.
For repetitive message playback, you can change
the interval between each series of messages.
Use Menu No. 29B, and select the time in the
range of 0 to 60 seconds.
Note: This function cannot be used when the Bug Key function
is ON.
Operating the keyer paddle with Menu No. 30 OFF cancels
message playback. Even if message playback does not stop
because of your keying start timing, you can cancel playback
by pressing [CLR].
Storing CW Messages
1. Press [CW/FSK/REV] to select CW mode. "CW" appears.
2. If VOX is ON, press [VOX/LEVEL]. The VOX LED turns off.
3. Press [FUNC] and [1/CHI/REC], [2/OH2/REC], or [3/CH3/REC]
to select a
memory channel to be recorded.
4. Begin sending using the keyer paddle. The message you send
is stored in memory.
5. To complete the message storage, press [CLR] to stop.
When the memory becomes full, recording automatically stops.
Note: If you do not operate the keyer paddle after starting
to
record a message, a pause is stored in the channel
Checking CW Messages without Transmitting
1. Press [CW/FSK/REV] to select CW mode. "CW" appears.
2. If VOX is ON, press [VOX/LEVEL] to switch it OFE
3. Press [1/CHI/REC], [2/CH2/REC], or
[3/CH3/REC] to select the channel to be
played back. The message is played back.
To play back the messages stored in the
other channels in sequence, press the
corresponding channel keys during
playback. Up to three channels can be
queued at the same time.
While playing back the messages, you can
also adjust the keyer speed by pressing
[KEY/DELAY] and turning the MULTI/CH
control.
To interrupt playback, press [CLR].
Transmitting CW Messages
Messages can be transmitted using Semi Break-
in/Full Break-in or manual TX/RX switching.
1. Press [CWl FSK/REV] to select CW mode. "CW"
appears.
2. To use Semi Break-in/Full Break-in, press
[VOX/LEVEL]. The VOX LED lights.
Otherwise, press [SEND].
3. Press [1/CH1/REC], [2/CH2/REC], or
[3/CH3/REC] to select the channel to be
played back. The message is played back and
transmitted automatically.
To transmit the messages stored in the
other channels in sequence, press the
corresponding channel keys during
playback. Up to three channels can be
queued at the same time.
While playing back the messages, you can
also adjust the keyer speed by pressing
[KEY/DELAY] and turning the MULTI/CH
control. To interrupt transmission, press [CLR].
If you pressed [SEND] in step 2, press [SEND]
again to return to receive mode.
Changing the Inter-message Interval Time
For the message playback repeat, select Menu
No. 29A and set it ON. You can also change the
interval playback time of the message. Use
Menu No. 29B, and select the time in the range
of 0 to 60 seconds, in steps of 1 second.
Note: Menu 29A and 29B settings are shared with the voice
communication modes when the optional DRU-3A is installed.
Changing the Sidetone Volume
Turning the MAIN AF or SUB AF control does not
change the CW sidetone playback volume. To
change the CW sidetone volume, access Menu
No. 13 and select OFF, or 1 to 9.
Insert Keying
If you operate a CW keyer manually while playing
back a recorded CW message, the transceiver
stops playing back the message. However, during
contests or regular QSOs, you may sometimes
want to insert a different number or message at a
certain point in the recorded message.
In this case, first record the CW message as usual
{page 43}, without the number or message you
want to insert. Then, access Menu No. 30 and
select ON.
Now if you operate a CW keyer while you play
back a recorded message, the transceiver pauses
the playback of the recorded message, instead of
stopping it. When you finish sending the number
or message with the keyer, the transceiver
resumes playback of the message.
FREQUENCY CORRECTION FOR CW
If you operate both SSB and CW modes, you would
sometimes use SSB mode (USB or LSB) just to
watch and listen CW signals. It is fine just to
monitor those CW signals but you have experienced
that changing the mode from SSB to CW results
losing the target CW signal. This is because the
frequency on the display always shows the true
carrier frequency for all modes. If you want the
transceiver to shift the receiving frequency to trace
the receiving CW signal when changing the mode
from SSB (USB or LSB) to CW, switch this function
ON. The transceiver shifts the receiving frequency
when changing the mode from SSB to CW. So, you
can still hear the target signal and instantly transmit
the signal in CW, without adjusting the frequency.
1. Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/CH control to
access Menu No. 37.
2. Press [+] to select ON.
3. Press [MENU] to store the settings and exit the
Menu mode.
AUTO CW TX IN SSB MODE
If you operate both SSB and CW modes, you can
configure the transceiver to change the operating
mode from SSB (USB or LSB) to CW and then
transmit in CW mode when you operate the CW
keyers.
1. Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/CH control to
access Menu No. 36.
2. Press [+] to select ON.
3. Press [MENU] to store the settings and exit the
Menu mode.
Note: You must switch the CW break-in function ON to change
the
mode and transmit in CW mode {page 42}.
SUB-RECEIVER
The TS-2000(X) transceiver is equipped with
2 independent receivers. The main transceiver can
receive from 30 kHz to the UHF band (or 1.2 GHz
band if the optional UT-20 is installed) while the sub-
receiver can receive signals in FM or AM mode on
the VHF (144 MHz) or UHF (430/440MHz) band.
You can assign the sub receiver to monitor the local
repeater activities or your club channel while you are
operating on the HF/50MHz or VHF/UHF/(Optional
1.2 GHz) bands with the main transceiver.
Since the TS-2000 also has a built-in TNC, you can
assign the sub-receiver to monitor the local DX
Packet Cluster channel activities without using an
external TNC. If a new DX station is reported to the
DX Packet Cluster, the transceiver automatically
displays the DX station data. If desired, you can
further transfer the DX frequency information to the
main tranceiver to watch and instantly make contact
with the DX station {page 53}.
TX BAND AND CONTROL BAND
In this manual, the frequency on the left of the display
is referred to as the MAIN band and the frequency on
the right is called the SUB band.
To understand how to control the MAIN band and
SUB band frequencies and functions, please note the
differences between the TX band and the Control
band, below.
TX BAND
Press [MAIN] to display the "PTT" and "CTRL'"
icons on
the MAIN band. When "PTT" is on the MAIN band
display, the MAIN band is currently selected as the
transmission band. You can use the MAIN band
frequency to transmit signals or to control the main
transceiver functions.
If you press [SUB], the "PTT" and “CTRL"
icons move to
the SUB band display. This means that the SUB
band is now selected as the transmission band and
controls the functions. You can use the SUB band
frequency to transmit signals or control the sub
receiver functions.
CONTROL BAND
On some occasions, you may need to adjust the
frequency and/or functions for the band you are not
transmitting on. To do this, press [CTRL]. For
example, if both "PTT'' and "CTRL" are on the
MAIN
band display, pressing [CTRL] will move "CTRL" to
the
SUB band display. "PTT'' remains on the MAIN band
display. This allows you to continue transmitting on
the MAIN band while you adjust the functions of the
sub-receiver.
RECEIVING
ACTIVATING THE SUB-RECEIVER
Press the SUB AF control to switch the sub-receiver
ON or OFF. The orange LED above the SUB AF/SQL
control lights when the sub-receiver is switched ON.
Note: When switching the sub-receiver ON or OFF, you may hear
a
popping sound from the speaker. This is not a malfunction.
CONTROLLING THE SUB-RECEIVER
To control all the available functions of the sub-
receiver, press [SUB] to transfer the controls and
transmission capability to the sub-receiver. The "PTT"
and "CTRL" icons move from the main transceiver
to the
sub-receiver. When you press [SEND] or the
microphone PTT switch, the transceiver transmits on
the SUB band frequency.
Or, if you would like to transmit and receive on the
MAIN band while adjusting the sub-receiver
functions, simply press [CTRL]. Only the "CTRL"
icon
moves from the main transceiver display to the sub
display. The "PTT" icon remains on the main
transceiver display. With this setup, you can continue
receiving and transmitting on the main transceiver
VFO frequencies while you are making adjustments
to the sub-receiver functions.
If you need to adjust only the frequency of the sub-
receiver, you can simply turn the RIT/SUB control.
However, this works only when you are operating the
main transceiver without the RIT/XIT functions.
When operating the main transceiver with the RIT/
XIT function, first switch OFF the RIT/XIT function by
pressing [RIT/CW TUNE] and/or [XIT/ALT], or press
[CTL] to move the controls to the SUB band. Then
turn the MAIN control, the MULTI/CH control or the
RIT/SUB control to adjust the SUB band frequency.
SELECTING A BAND
Press [SUB] or [CTRL] to assign the function
controls to the sub-receiver.
Press [+] or [-] to select the 144 MHz or the
430 (440) MHz band.
10 SUB-RECEIVER
Holding down the key changes the bands
continuously.
If "MHz" is visible on the display, first press
[1MHz] to exit from the 1MHz Step Up/Down
mode.
ADJUSTING THE AUDIO FREQUENCY (AF) GAIN
Turn the SUB AF control clockwise to increase the
audio level and counterclockwise to decrease the
level.
Note: The position of the SUB AF control does not affect
the volume
of beeps caused by pressing buttons. The audio level for Packet
operation is also independent of the SUB AF control setting.
ADJUSTING THE SQUELCH
Turn the SUB SQL control clockwise when no signals
are present, to select the squelch level at which
background noise is just eliminated. The SUB band
LED turns off when the squelch is ON.
SELECTING A FREQUENCY
When you operate both the main transceiver and the
sub-receiver at the same time, you will be in one of
the following conditions. First, check where the "PTT"
and "CTRL" icons are on the display, then follow
the
instructions below.
The "PTT" and "CTRL" icons are both on
the MAIN band
display: Turn the RIT/SUB control to adjust the sub-
receiver frequency.
"PTT" is on the SUB band display and "CTRL"
is on the
MAIN band display:
Turn the RIT/SUB control to adjust the sub-
receiver frequency.
"PTT" is on the MAIN band display and "CTRL"
is on the
SUB band display:
Turn the RIT/SUB control, the MULTI/CH control,
or the MAIN control to adjust the frequency. Or,
directly enter the frequency using the numeric
keypad {page 37}. However, the input frequency
must be within the sub-receiver frequency range.
The frequency you selected may round up to the
nearest workable frequency step size {page 37}.
The "PTT" and "CTRL" icons are both on
the sub-
receiver display:
You can do all the above, plus transmit on the
SUB band frequency.
This transceiver provides many other methods for
selecting a frequency quickly. For further details, refer
to "SELECTING YOUR FREQUENCY" {page 37}.
SUB-RECEIVER PANEL METER
The multifunction meter measures the parameters
described in the table below. The S-meter appears
when in receive mode and the PWR meter appears
when in transmit mode. Peak readings for the
S- meter and PWR functions are held momentarily.
Scale - S has display=Received signal strength. Function state
= receive
Scale – PWR has display= Transmit output power. Function
state=transmit
Note: Peak Hold readings cannot be deactivated.
SELECTING A MODE FOR THE SUB-RECEIVER
First, confirm that the "CTRL" icon is on the SUB
band
display. If it is not, press [SUB] or [CTRL] to assign
the function controls to the SUB band.
The SUB band can only be used to transmit in FM
mode and receive in FM or AM mode. Press [FM/
AM/NAR] to toggle the operating mode for the sub-
receiver. The narrow bandwidth operation for AM is
not available for the SUB band frequency. Refer to
"Narrow Bandwidth for FM" {page 29} for FM
operation.
FM CTCSS OPERATION
You can assign an independent CTCSS tone to the
sub-receiver. Refer to FM CTCSS OPERATION
{page 35} for function and control details.
FM DCS OPERATION
You can assign an independent DCS code to the sub-
receiver. Refer to FM DCS OPERATION {page 36}
for function and control details.
TONE FREQ. ID SCAN
This function scans through all the tone frequencies
in order to identify the incoming tone frequency on
the receiving signal of the sub-receiver. Refer to
TONE FREQ. ID SCAN {page 34} for function and
control details.
DCS CODE ID SCAN
This function scans through all the DCS codes in
order to identify the incoming DCS code on the
receiving signal of sub-receiver. Refer to DCS CODE
ID SCAN {page 36} for function and control details.
ATTENUATOR
The attenuator reduces the level of received signals. It
is useful when there is strong interference from an
adjacent frequency. Since the main transceiver and
sub-receiver share the same antenna for the 144 MHz
and 430 (440) MHz bands, activating the attenuator
function for the sub-receiver also causes the function
to switch ON for the same band of the main
transceiver.
PRE-AMPLIFIER
The pre-amplifier amplifies the level of received
signals. It is useful when the receiving signal is weak.
If there is no strong interference from adjacent
frequencies, switch the pre-amplifier ON to raise the
receiving signal level. Since the main transceiver and
sub-receiver share the same antenna for the 144 MHz
and 430 (440) MHz bands, activating the pre-amplifier
function for the sub-receiver also causes the function
to switch ON for the same band of the main
transceiver.
DUAL WATCH
If different frequency bands are set on the main
transceiver and sub-receiver, you can still monitor the
other band activities while transmitting on the TX
band. It is useful that you can still monitor the local
repeater frequency (VHF or UHF band) while you are
working on a DX station on the HF band of the main
transceiver.
If you have the same frequency band (VHF or UHF
band) for the main transceiver and sub-receiver, you
can monitor both frequencies independently at the
same time. However, both receivers will temporarily
mute when you transmit because the transceiver
shares the same 144 MHz and 430 (440) MHz band
antenna between the main transceiver and sub-
receiver.
SCAN
All types of scanning are also available for the sub-
receiver. However, the operating frequency range is
limited to the sub-receiver's frequency coverage.
Refer to "SCAN" {page 66} for details on how to
operate the scan function.
NOISE REDUCTION
Since the sub-receiver can receive only in FM or AM
mode, DSP noise reduction 1 (Line Enhanced) is
available to reduce the noise from the receiving
signals. Refer to "REJECTING INTERFERENCE"
{page 56} for details on how to control and adjust the
function.
TRANSMITTING
First, confirm that the "PTT]" icon is on the SUB
band
display. Press [SEND] or press and hold Mic [PTT],
then speak into the microphone in your normal tone
of voice. When you finish speaking, press [SEND]
again or release Mic [PTT].
SELECTING A TRANSMIT POWER
You can also adjust the output power for FM mode in
the 144 and 430 (440) MHz bands when you are
operating the sub-receiver.
1. Press [PWR]. The current transmit power appears.
2. Turn the MULTI/CH control counterclockwise to
reduce the power or clockwise to increase the
power.
Note: The selectable range varies depending on the band and
mode
{page 79}. Output power configuration is also reflected in
the main
transceiver.
MICROPHONE GAIN
Access Menu No. 41 and select "LOW", "MID",
or
"HIGH" for the microphone gain.
Note: When using the optional MC-90 microphone in FM mode,
select "HIGH" microphone gain. Microphone sensitivity
is low in FM
mode; this may cause insufficient modulation. For other
microphones, select "MID" or "LOW".
FM REPEATER OPERATION
You can also configure an independent repeater
offset frequency for the sub-receiver, if necessary.
Refer to "FM REPEATER OPERATION" {page 32} for
details.
REVERSE FUNCTION
Press [TF-SET] to switch the sub-receiver Reverse
function ON (or OFF). "R" appears while the Reverse
function is active on the sub-receiver. Refer to
"REVERSE FUNCTION'' {page 34} for details.
10 SUB-RECEIVER
AUTOMATIC SIMPLEX CHECK (ASC)
You can also use ASC functions on the 144 MHz and
430 (440) MHz bands of the sub-receiver. While
using a repeater, ASC periodically monitors the
strength of the uplink frequency to check the signals.
Press and hold [TF-SET] until "[R]" appears on the
SUB band display. Refer to "AUTOMATIC SIMPLEX
CHECK" {page 34} for function and control details.
TRANSMITTING A TONE
You can assign another Tone to the sub-receiver.
Refer to "TRANSMITTING A TONE" {page 33} for
function and control details.
MEMORY
You can also utilize all the memory functions {page 58},
including the Quick Memory function {page 64}, while
you are operating the sub-receiver. However, the
operating frequency range is limited to the sub-
receiver's frequency coverage. You cannot recall any
memory channels that are outside the sub-receiver's
frequency coverage. These channels are automatically
skipped when they are recalled on the sub-receiver.
PACKET RADIO
Packet is a unit of data transmitted as a whole from
one computer to another, on a network. Packets can
be transmitted on radio waves as well as on
communications lines. Besides a transceiver and a
computer, all you need is a terminal node controller
(TNC) or Multimode Communications Processor
(MCP). One of the tasks of TNCs and MCPs is to
convert data packets to audio tones, and vice versa.
This transceiver has a built-in TNC which allows you
to use basic (not full) packet applications.
A variety of packet applications developed by hams
include packet bulletin board systems (PBBSs).
PBBSs are created and maintained by volunteers
called System Operators (SysOp). You may access
one of your local PBBSs to send e-mail, download
files, or obtain various useful information. Thousands
of PBBSs, which have formed a worldwide network,
relay e-mail to their intended destinations around the
world.
When you access a local PBBS for the first time, you
often need to register as a new user. After you are
successfully registered, it will then be available as
your home PBBS. E-mail addressed to you will be
held under a directory, called a mailbox, on your
home PBBS.
To send e-mail, you must designate the address of a
recipient, using his or her call sign and the call sign of
his or her home PBBS; ex. KD6NUH@KJ6HC. In this
example, the e-mail is addressed to KD6NUH whose
home PBBS is KJ6HC. If your home PBBS cannot
find KJ6HC in its address file to forward your mail,
you must designate the address in more detail. You
may enter "KD6NUH @ KJ6HC.#ABC.CA", or
"KD6NUH @ KJ6HC.#ABC.CA.USA", or up to
"KD6NUH @ KJ6HC.#ABC.CA.USA.NA", as
necessary. The complete address of a recipient living
in the U.S.A., for example, should include an
appropriate region code (preceded by a #), state,
country, and continent abbreviations, as above.
For further information, consult reference books
which should be available at any store that handles
Amateur Radio equipment. Web pages relating to
Packet will also be helpful. On Internet search
engines, use "Packet Radio" as key words to find
those Web pages.
Note: Unlike a TNC, a Multimode Communications Processor
(MCP)
serves as a communications interface in several digital modes
such as Packet, R7-F, and AMTOR. You can cause it to switch
among the modes by sending a single command from your
computer.
If there is an amateur radio club in your area, consider
becoming
a member. You can often learn more in an hour from
experienced hobbyists, than in a month of independent research.
Ask on the local repeaters, or contact your national amateur
radio
organization (the ARRL in the U.S.A.) for information on local
amateur radio clubs. You'll be glad you did.
BUILT-IN TNC
This transceiver has a built-in TNC which conforms to
the AX.25 protocol. Since the built-in TNC has been
designed to work with the Packet Cluster Tune
{page 53} and Sky Commander I1+ {page 83}
functions, some of the enhanced TNC commands
may not be available. For the commands supported
by the built-in TNC, consult "BUILT-IN TNC
COMMAND LIST" starting on page 110. The AX-25
protocol is used for communication between TNCs.
The TNC accepts data from your personal computer
and assembles it into packets. It then converts those
packets to audio tones which the transceiver can
transmit. The TNC also takes audio tones from the
transceiver, converts them to data for the computer,
and checks for errors in the data.
In order to activate the built-in TNC, access Menu
No. 55 and select ON. The default is OFE "PKT"
will appear to show that the built-in TNC is ON.
The TNC mainly functions in Command or Converse
mode. First, you should learn the difference between
these two modes.
Command mode
When you select Packet mode, the TNC enters
Command mode. A "cmd:" prompt appears on the
computer screen. You can type commands from
the computer keyboard to change the settings of
the TNC. When in Converse mode, press
[Ctrl]+[C] on the keyboard to return to Command
mode.
Converse mode
The TNC enters this mode when a link with the
target station is established. On the computer
keyboard, type an appropriate command and a
message if necessary, then press [Enter] or
[Return]. What you type is converted into packets
and transmitted over the air. When in Command
mode, type CONVERSE, CONV, or K to enter
Converse mode.
Note: The bumt-in TNC automatica//y reinitiates when a ma/function
is detected; this does not designate that the transceiver
is defective.
11 SPECIALIZED COMMUNICATIONS
PREPARATION
1. Connect the transceiver to your personal
computer (via an external TNC or MCP if desired).
See "COMPUTER" {page 93} and "MCP AND TNC"
{page 95}.
2. Install an appropriate terminal program onto the
personal computer.
A variety of freeware and shareware programs
can be obtained in various ways. Consult your
reference material or other "packeteers".
3. Initiate the terminal program and set the following
parameters on the personal computer:
Transfer rate (TNC/MCP <-> Computer): 9600 bps (default
setting)
Data length: 8 bit
Stop bit: 1 bit
Parity: Non-parity
Flow control: Hardware
4. 4 Press [A/B] to select VFO A or VFO B.
5. Access Menu No. 46 and select the main band or
the sub-band (default) as the data band.
"TNC" appears on the data band.
If you are using an external TNC or MCP,
access Menu No. 50E to make this selection.
The default is main band.
6. Access Menu No. 47 and select 1200 bps (default)
or 9600 bps as the transfer rate between TNCs.
You must select the same transfer rate as the
target station. If you are using an external TNC or MCP,
access Menu No. 50F to make this selection.
The default is 1200 bps.
7. Select an operating frequency.
8. Press [LSB/USB/AUTO] or [FM/AM/NAR] to
select LSB, USB, or FM mode.
9. Access Menu No. 50A and select ON to activate
the DSP packet filter for the main transceiver.
10. Turn the HI/SHIFT control to select the center
frequency of the packet mode. You can further
select either "NAR" (narrow) or "WID"
(wide) for
the receiver filter width by turning the LO/WIDTH
control.
Center Frequency=1000 Hz Operating Mode=PSK31
Center Frequency=1700 Hz Operating mode=Packet (AFSK 1200
bps)
Center Frequency=2210 Hz Operating mode=Packet (AFSK 300 bps)
Center Frequency=PSK Operating mode=PSK
Note: The packet (9600 bps) operation is not affected by
the DSP
packet filter settings. The DSP packet filter works only on
the main transceiver.
If you are using an external TNC or MCP, proceed with the
subsequent steps.
11. Following the instructions provided with your TNC
or MCP, enter the calibration mode so that you
can generate a mark condition. The MAIN band LED changes from
green (RX)
to red (TX).
12. Access Menu No. 50B to select the appropriate AF input
level.
Select a proper input level, so that the ALC meter reflects
within the ALC zone.
13. Exit the calibration mode. The MAIN band LED changes from
red (TX) to
green (RX).
14. Access Menu No. 50C to select the appropriate AF output
level.
You cannot use the AF control to make this adjustment.
If you have selected sub-band in step 5, access Menu No. 50D
instead.
The frequencies (measured in kHz) commonly used
for Packet are listed below:
USA/Canada - 1800 – 1830 ARU Region 1 (Europe/Africa)=none
USA/Canada - 3620 – 3635 ARU Region 1 (Europe/Africa)=3590
- 3600
USA/Canada - 7080 – 7100 ARU Region=none
USA/Canada - 10140- 10150 ARU Region=none
USA/Canada -14095- 14099.5 ARU Region=14089- 14099,14101 –
14112
USA/Canada - 18105 –18110 ARU Region=none
USA/Canada - 21090 – 21100 ARU Region=21100 - 21120
USA/Canada - 28120 ~ 28189 ARU Region=28120 -28150,29200 -29300
USA/Canada - 50600 50780 ARU=none
USA/Canada - 144910 145090 ARU Region=none
USA/Canada 440975 ~ 441075 ARU region = 430050 - 431025
DCD SENSE: You can also select the method for inhibiting
the built-
in TNC from transmitting. Access Menu No. 48 and
select one of the two methods. The default is "TNC BAND".
TNC BAND: The TNC does not transmit when signals are present
on the TNC (data) band.
MAIN&SUB: The TNC does not transmit when signals are
present
on the main transceiver or sub-receiver.
RADIO TELETYPEWRITING (RTTY)
RTTY is the data communications mode with the
longest history. It was originally designed for use with
mechanical teletypewriters which were often used
before personal computers became common. Now
you can easily start operating RTTY with a personal
computer and MCP. Unlike Packet, each time you
type a letter, it is transmitted over the air. What you
typed is transmitted and displayed on the computer
screen of the recipient.
RTTY operation uses frequency shift keying (FSK)
and the 5-bit Baudot code or the 7-bit ASCII code to
transmit information.
For the cable connections, see "RTTY" {page 95}.
For further information, consult reference books
about Amateur Radio.
1. Access Menu No. 38 and select an FSK shift.
FSK shift is the difference in frequencies
between a mark and a space. The 170 Hz default is used on
the Amateur
bands.
2. Access Menu No. 39 and select a key-down polarity.
Select "NORMAL" to transmit a mark when
keying down or "INVERS" to transmit a space.
The default is "NORMAL".
3. Access Menu No. 40 and select high tone
(2125 Hz) or low tone (1275 Hz) for mark.
High tone (default) is commonly used nowadays.
4. Select an operating frequency.
5. Press [CW/FSK/REV] to select FSK. "FSK" appears.
6. If necessary to be compatible with the other
station, press [FUNC], [CW/FSK/REV] to reverse
the transceiver to the upper sideband. "FSR" appears.
Traditionally, the lower sideband is used for
FSK operation. Press [FUNC], [CW/FSK/REV] to return to
the lower sideband.
7. Following the instructions provided with your MCP,
enter a command from your computer to select
transmit mode. The MAIN band LED changes from green (RX)
to red (TX). You may instead press [SEND] to manually
select the transmit mode. Begin sending data from your computer.
Use Menu No. 50C to select the appropriate AF
output level. The AF control cannot be used
for this adjustment.
Press [FUNC], [PWR/TX MONI] to monitor
your signals. Press [FUNC], [PWR/TX MONI]
again to quit this function.
When finished transmitting, enter a command from
your computer to return to receive mode.
The MAIN band LED changes from red (TX) to
green (RX).
If you pressed [SEND] in step 7, press [SEND]
again.
The frequencies (measured in kHz) commonly used
for RTTY operation are listed below:
USA/Canada – 1800~1840 ARU Region 1 (Europe/Asia)=1838~1842
USA/Canada - 3605 - 3645 (DX: 3590) ARU Region=3580 ~ 3620
USA/Canada - 7080 - 7100 (DX:7040) ARU Region=7035 - 7045
USA/Canada - 10140- 10150 ARU Region=10140- 10150
USA/Canada - 14070 - 14099.5 ARU Region=14080 - 14099.5
USA/Canada - 18100- 18110 ARU Region=18101 ~ 18109
USA/Canada - 21070 – 21100 ARU Region=21080 - 21120
USA/Canada - 24920 – 24930 ARU Region=22920 ~ 24929
USA/Canada - 28070 – 28150 ARU Region=28050 ~ 28150
Note: You may adjust the carrier level when necessary. Press
[FUNC], [MIC/ CAR] to enter the adjustment mode. With a key
down
condition, turn the MULTI/CH control so that the ALC meter
reads in
the ALC zone but does not exceed the upper ALC zone limit.
11 SPECIALIZED COMMUNICATIONS
AMTOR/PacTOR/CLOVER/G-TOR/PSK31
Besides Packet and RTTY, digital modes which have
been used among hams include AMTOR, PacTOR,
CLOVER, G-TOR, and PSK31. This manual does not
describe much about these modes. For details,
consult reference books about Amateur Radio.
AMTOR (AMateur Teleprinting Over Radio) has
brought amateur HF digital communication into the
computer age. It is the first error-free HF digital mode
by which data bursts (not steady stream of data) are
transmitted.
PacTOR (Packet Teleprinting On Radio) has
combined the best features of both AMTOR and
Packet to improve the efficiency of HF digital
communications. Like Packet and AMTOR, PacTOR
sends error-free data using a handshaking method.
Of all the Amateur Radio HF digital modes, CLOVER
offers the best overall performance using a
complicated modulation technique, automatic power
adjustment and other advanced features. It may
allow communications to be maintained under the
worst conditions.
G-TOR (Golay-coded Teleprinting Over Radio) is a
relatively new Amateur Radio digital mode currently in
use. G-TOR was developed specifically to handle the
adverse conditions of communicating, across the
solar system, with spacecraft during their missions.
PSK31 was developed by an RTTY enthusiast,
G3PLX, in the Great Britain. The operating technique
is very similar to the conventional Baudot-RTTY,
although more sensitive fine-tuning is required, as a
PSK31 signal requires a tuning accuracy of a few
Hertz. A special feature of PSK31 is that it allows the
entire ASCII character set, including the back space
character.
Your MCP should handle some or all of the above
modes. For available modes on your MCP, consult
the instruction manual for the MCP. For the cable
connections, see "MCP AND TNC" {page 95}.
On most HF bands, audio frequency shift keying
(AFSK) is used for the above modes. This method of
modulation uses audio tones therefore either LSB or
USB mode should be selected. Traditionally, LSB is
used, similar to RTTY, with the exception of AMTOR
which is normally operated in USB.
AMTOR activity can be found on or near 14075 and
3637.5 kHz. These are also good starting places
when searching for PacTOR, Clover, G-TOR, or
PSK31 stations.
Note: When using SSB mode for digital operation, use a fast
AGC
setting and switch your Speech Processor OFF.
SLOW SCAN TV/FACSIMILE
Slow-scan Television (SSTV) is a popular application
for transmitting still images over the air, from one
station to another. Instead of trying to describe your
station, simply showing it is much faster. Transmitting
images over the air requires a scan converter,
besides a transceiver. A scan converter transforms
images taken with a video camera into audio signals
that can be fed into your transceiver. The recipient's
scan converter transforms audio signals back into
video images so that he or she can view them on a
TV set.
Nowadays instead of a scan converter, many hams
use a personal computer, a software application, and
an interface attached to the transceiver. This is much
cheaper, more flexible, and does not require a TV set.
In recent years, many low cost digital cameras have
become available. You can transfer images from
these cameras into your computer.
For further information, consult reference books about
Amateur Radio. The frequencies (measured in kHz)
commonly used for SSTV operation are listed below:
USA/Canada= 3845,3857 ARU Region=3730 - 3740
USA/Canada=7171 ARU Region=7035 - 7045
USA/Canada=14230,14233 ARU Region=14225 ~ 14235
USA/Canada=21340 ARU Region=21335 - 21345
USA/Canada=28680 ARU Region=28675 - 28685
USA/Canada=145500 ARU Region=none
Fax (facsimile) is one of the original image
transmission modes. Using this mode allows you to
exchange more detailed graphics than SSTV.
Amateur Radio fax functions much like old analog fax
systems. It scans paper and converts acquired
image data into a series of tones representing white
and black portions of the image. Because fax
requires longer transmission time, you should use it
only when band conditions are stable with strong
signals.
Popular fax frequencies include the following:
7245, 14245, 21345 (International Net), and
28945 kHz
Operating on SSTV or fax mainly involves learning
the functionality of your computer application or
accessory hardware that supports these modes.
Consult the instruction manual that comes with your
software or accessory equipment.
Note: When operating either SSTV or fax, use a fast AGC setting
and switch OFF your Speech Processor, for best results.
DX PACKET CLUSTER TUNE
DX Packet Cluster is a packet network which consist
of nodes and stations who are interested in DXing
and contesting. If one station finds a DX station on
the air, he or she sends a notice to his or her node.
This node then passes the information to all its local
stations as well as another node. This transceiver
can display received DX information and hold the
latest information on up to 10 DX stations.
This transceiver is also capable of automatically
tuning in a reported DX station. In order to use the
Auto Tune function, access Menu No. 49A and select
AUTO; the default is MANUAL.
1. Press [A/B] to select VFO A or VFO B.
2. Press [SUB] to activate the sub-receiver.
3. The SUB LED lights.
4. Tune to the frequency of the target DX Packet
Cluster node on the sub-receiver.
5. Press [FUNC], [SET/P.C.T.] to enter the Packet
Clusters Monitor mode. Each time new DX Packet Cluster data
is
received, an alarm sounds and the information
is displayed on the sub-receiver as shown
below: Press [FUNC], [SET/P.C.T.] again to exit this
mode.
6. If you are using the Auto Tune function, press
[SET/P.C.T.]. The main band is tuned to the frequency of the
reported DX station, on the sub-receiver.
Transmitting on the tuned frequency
deactivates the Auto Tune. Press [SET/P.C.T.]
again to reactivate it, if necessary.
To access desired DX information from memory,
press QUICK MEMO [MR], then turn the MULTI/CH
control. Press [SET/P.C.T.] to tune the main band to
the selected station. Press QUICK MEMO [MR]
again to quit the DX information display.
The transceiver can be set to output a Morse code
instead of a beep when new DX Packet Cluster data
is received. Access Menu No. 49B and select
MORSE. VOICE or OFF can also be set.
Note: You cannot send DX information to a node using this
function.
The DX information in memory is cleared when the transceiver
power is turned OFF.
SATELLITE OPERATION
Amateur satellites receive on one band and transmit
on another. This transceiver can handle uplink/
downlink frequency combinations simultaneously as
shown below.
Some satellites require a rotator that allows azimuth
and elevation control, plus a high-gain directional
antenna. The antenna must track the satellite which
travels from horizon to horizon. Even so, many hams
have been successfully using fixed omnidirectional
antennas. If you are using a directional antenna, it
would be wise to obtain a pass prediction program.
Doppler Shift is another aspect that you must take
into account when working the satellites. As a target
satellite travels away, frequencies on which you will
receive change. This transceiver has a function that
automatically keeps the sum or difference between
the two frequencies identical when you change the
receive frequency.
For further information, consult Internet Web pages
relating to Amateur satellites. On Internet search
engines, use "AMSAT" as key words to find those
Web pages. Or, you can directly go to the AMSAT
(the Radio Amateur Satellite Corporation) homepage
at http://www.amsat.org. From AMSAT Web pages,
you can download a variety of utilities, including pass
prediction programs, which will ease your satellite
operations.
BASIC OPERATION
When you enter the Satellite mode, you are always
controlling one of 10 Satellite Memory channels with
the adjustable frequency function. The Satellite
Memory channel number (0 ~ 9) appears on the main
transceiver's display when you enter the mode.
1. Press [SATL] to enter Satellite mode.
The default downlink (435.9 MHz) and uplink
(145.9 MHz) frequencies appear.
"TRACE", "R", and "SATL" appear
to indicate
the current selections.
2. On VFO A, tune to the downlink (RX) frequency of
the satellite.
3. Press [LSB/USB/AUTO] or [CW/FSK/REV] to
select LSB, USB, or CW mode.
4. As the Satellite moves, fine tune to the changing
downlink (RX) frequency of the satellite using the
Tuning control (adjusting the Doppler effect).
As you adjust the downlink (RX) frequency, the
Trace function automatically changes the uplink
frequency so that the sum of the two
frequencies is kept the same (Reverse Trace).
If necessary, press [A=B / TRACE] to quit the
Trace function. "TRACE" disappears.
The trace function can also change the uplink
(TX) frequency so that the difference between
the two frequencies is kept the same (Normal
Trace).
5. If you want to switch to the normal trace mode,
press [SPLIT / REV]. "R" disappears.
6. To adjust the frequency on the sub-band display
(normally the uplink frequency) without tracing,
turn the RIT/SUB control. To adjust it using the
trace function, press [A/B / M/S] to swap the main
band frequency and sub-band frequency then turn
the Tuning control or MULTI/CH control. The
following table shows which control to use when
adjusting frequencies with tracing ON and OFF.
Main Control (fine) for Trace/Trace R on use Main & Sub;
trace/trace R off use main.
Multi/CH control (coarse) for Trace/trace R on use main &
sub; trace/trace R off use main/
RIT/sub control for trace/trace R on use sub; trace/trace
R off use sub.
STORING SATELLITE MEMORY CHANNELS
You can store all the above settings to one of 10
Satellite memory channels for the future operations.
1. Press [M.IN], then turn the MULTI/CH control to
select a channel from 0 to 9.
2. 2 Select your desired settings.
3. Press [M.IN] again to store the selection to the
memory channel. To quit, press [CLR].
Note: The Satellite Memory channel does not hold the frequency
adjustment values when the channel is changed. So, when you
change the channel number or switch the transceiver OFF, the
adjustment frequency values are cleared if they are not stored
by
pressing [M.IN].
RECALLING A SATELLITE MEMORY CHANNEL
1. Press [VFO/M/VFO/CH]. The MULTI/CH LED lights.
2. Turn the MULTI/CH control to select the desired
Satellite Memory channel.
3. Press [VFO/M / VFO/CH] to return to the
frequency adjustment mode.
SATELLITE CHANNEL NAME
You can name each Satellite Memory channel using a
maximum of 8 alpha-numeric characters. First, store
the settings to the Satellite Memory channel {above}.
To store the Satellite Channel name:
1. Press [M.IN] then turn the MULTI/CH control to
select the Satellite Memory channel.
2. Press [DISP].
3. An entry cursor appears. Select a character by
turning MULTI/CH control, then move the cursor
using [SUB] or [MAIN]. You can also use the
other methods to enter the characters. Refer to
page 63 for details.
4. Press [M.IN] to store the name to the Satellite
Memory channel. Press [CLR] to quit.
5. The stored Satellite Memory name appears on the
main dot-matrix display.
QUICK MEMORY IN SATELLITE MODE
While in the Satellite mode, only 1 Quick Memory
channel is available. It uses Satellite Memory
channel 9 to store the settings. To store the settings
to the Quick Memory in Satellite mode, press QUICK
MEMO [M.IN]. The settings are stored to Satellite
Memory channel 9.
To recall the Quick Memory, press QUICK MEMO
[MR] or select Satellite Memory channel 9, using the
MULTI/CH control. Satellite Memory channel 9 is
recalled.
CHECKING THE UPLINK FREQUENCY
When you need to monitor the uplink (TX) frequency,
press [TF-SET]. Each time you press [TF-SET], the
uplink (TX) frequency and the downlink (RX)
frequency are swapped.
USING XIT/RIT IN SATELLITE MODE
You can also use the RIT or XIT function while in the
Satellite mode. Press [RIT/CW TUNE] or [XIT/ALT]
to activate the function. When the RIT or XIT function
is ON, the sub-band frequency display shows the
current RIT or XIT offset frequency instead of the
operating frequency. To clear the RIT or XIT offset
frequency, press [CLEAR].
Note: You cannot activate both the RIT and XIT functions at
the
same time in the Satellite mode.
CHANGING THE FREQUENCY BAND
If you need to change the uplink and/or downlink
frequency band, press [CTRL] to move the "r""
icon
to the frequency band that you want to change.
Then, press [+] or [-] to select the band you want to
operate.
DSP FILTERS
KENWOOD digital signal processing (DSP)
technology is used for the functions described in this
section. Using DSP filtering, the TS-2000 frees you
from installing many analog filters for each operating
mode. Additionally, you can control the bandwidth,
cancel the multiple jamming beat, and reduce the
noise level using DSP filtering technology.
CHANGING THE RECEIVE FILTER BANDWIDTH
For improving interference reduction capability, this
transceiver also provides IF filters designed using
DSP technology. When in SSB, FM, or AM mode,
you can change the filter bandwidth by altering its low
and/or high cut-off frequency. For CW and FSK
modes, you can change the filter bandwidth by
directly specifying a bandwidth. Changing the filter
bandwidth does not affect the current receive
frequency.
Note: The receive filter bandwidth can be changed only on
the main
transceiver.
The IF DSP filter is not available in FM mode.
SSB/FM/AM Modes
1. Select SSB, FM, or AM mode.
2. Press [DISP/SEL]. The current filter selection appears.
3. Turn the LO/WIDTH control clockwise to raise
the low cut-off frequency, or counterclockwise
to lower the low cut-off frequency.
Turn the HI/SHIFT control clockwise to raise
the high cut-off frequency, or counterclockwise
to lower the high cut-off frequency.
Adjust lo/width…..frequency selections (Hz) 0,50, 100,
200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900, 1000.
Adust hi/shift……..frequency selections (Hz) 1400,
1600, 1800, 2000, 2200, 2400, 2600, 2800, 3000, 3400,
4000, 5000.
Mode - SSB/FM has default low-cut frequency (Hz) of 300; default
high-cut frequency of 2600.
Mode – AM has default low-cut frequency of 100; default
high-cut frequency of 5000.
4. To return the display to the current operating mode, press
[DISP/SEL].
Note: The cut-off frequencies can be adjusted independently
for
each operating mode. When you change the operating
mode, the previous setting is recalled for each operating
mode.
When the Packet filter (Menu No. 50A) is ON, you cannot
change the DSP filter bandwidth. Switch the Packet filter
OFF to adjust the DSP filter bandwidth.
CW/FSK Modes
1. Press [CW/FSK/REV] to select CW or FSK mode.
2. Press [DISP/SEL]. The current filter selection appears.
3. Turn the LO/WIDTH control clockwise to increase (wide)
the bandwidth, or
counterclockwise to decrease (narrow) the bandwidth.
Mode – CW has bandwidth selections (Hz) of 50, 80, 100,
150, 200, 300, 400,
600, 500,600,1000,2000 with default of 600 Hz
Mode - FSK has bandwidth selections (Hz) of 250,500,1000,1500
with default of 1500.
4. As for CW, you can further adjust the shift
frequency for passband. Turn the HI/SHIFT
control to adjust the shift frequency from 400 to
1000 Hz in steps of 50 Hz. The default shift
frequency is 800 Hz.
5. To return the display to the current operating
mode, press [DISP/SEL].HI/SHIFT
NOTCH FILTER (SSB)
Auto Notch filter automatically locates and attenuates
any single interfering tone within the receive pass
band. This function operates digitally at the IF filter
level, hence it can affect your S-meter reading and
may also affect (slightly attenuate) your desired
signal. However, controlling the AGC level by
notching out the strong interfering beat signals could
bring up the desired SSB signal that is covered by the
interfering beat signal. If the interfering tone is weak,
you may find that Beat Cancel eliminates them more
effectively.
Press [A.N./LEVEL] to toggle the Auto Notch Filter
ON and OFF
A.N." appears when the function is ON.
The interfering beat signals are notched out.
If the interfering beat signals change the tone
frequency randomly, you can adjust the Auto Notch
level.
Press [FUNC], [A.N./LEVEL] to access the Auto
Notch level adjustment, then turn the MULTI/CH
control to select the level from FIX, and 1 to 4.
Level 1 is the slowest beat tone tracking speed and
Level 4 is the fastest. FIX terminates the beat tone
tracking. Adjust this pamameter manually to remove
the beat signal if necessary.
AUTO BEAT CANCEL (SSB/AM)
Auto Beat Cancel uses an adaptive filter and
attenuates more than one cyclic interference within the
receive pass band. The adaptive filter changes its
characteristics according to the nature of the signal
being received at any given moment. You can use
automatic Beat Cancel when in SSB or AM mode.
Press [B.C./MANUAL] to toggle the Auto Beat
Cancel ON and OFF
"B. C." appears when the function is ON.
If desired, you can manually control the beat
cancel frequency.
MANUAL BEAT CANCEL (CW/SSB/AM)
Press [FUNC], [B.C./MANUAL], then turn the
MANUAL BC control to select the single Beat Cancel
frequency manually. You can select the beat cancel
frequency from approx. 300Hz to 3000 Hz by turning
the control. Turn the control clockwise to select a
higher frequency and counterclockwise to select a
lower frequency.
Since the DSP Beat Cancel processes the incoming
signals at the AF stage, strong beat signals may
control the AGC, then weaken the target signal level.
In this case, use the Auto Notch Filter instead, to
remove the beat signal from the IF passband filter.
Note: While adjusting the MANUAL BC control, the transceiver
clicks. This is not a malfunction.
NOISE REDUCTION
(N.R.I: ALL MODES, N.R.2: SSB/CW/FSK/AM)
This transceiver provides two types of Noise Reduction
functions (1 and 2) for reducing random noise which
interferes with the desired signal. Trying them both is
the easiest way to judge which function works more
effectively under the current conditions. Normally,
select Noise Reduction 1 (Line Enhanced) in SSB
mode and Noise Reduction 2 (SPAC) in CW mode.
Press [N.R./LEVEL] to toggle between Noise
Reduction 1, Noise Reduction 2, and OFF.
"N. R. 1" or "N.R. 2" appears, depending
on which
function is selected.
Setting the N.R. 1 Level Adjustment
The Noise Reduction 1 (Line Enhanced Method)
uses an adaptive filter to reduce the noise element
from the received signals. When the S/N ratio is
reasonably good in SSB, using N.R.1 will improve
the S/N further.
While N.R. 1 is ON, you can further adjust the noise
reduction level by pressing [FUNC], [N.R./LEVEL],
then turn the MULTI/CH control to select the level
from 1 to 10 or AUTO. The default is AUTO.
Setting the N.R. 2 Time Constant
You can change the correlation time for Noise
Reduction 2 (SPAC). When in SSB mode, select
the correlation time that allows you to hear signals
with more clarity. When receiving CW, it is best to
select the longest correlation time that allows
reliable reception. The longer the correlation time,
the better the S/N ratio.
When Noise Reduction 2 is ON, press [FUNC],
[N.R./LEVEL], then turn the MULTI/CH control to
select the correlation time from 2 ms to 20 ms.
The default is 20 ms.
Note: Using Noise Reduction 2 in SSB mode may lower the clarity
of
signals or induce pulse noise, depending on the conditions.
Only N.R. 1 is available for the sub-receiver. However, the
level cannot be adjusted.
NOISE BLANKER
Noise Blanker was designed to reduce pulse noise
such as that generated by automobile ignitions.
Noise Blanker does not function in FM mode.
Press [NB/LEVEL] to toggle the Noise Blanker ON
and OFF.
"NB" appears when the function is ON.
You can further adjust the Noise blanker level from
1 to 10. The default level is 6.
Press [FIJNC], [NB/LEVEL], then turn the MIJLTI/CH
control to adjust the noise blanker level.
"NB LEVEL" and the current level appear on the
sub dot-matrix display.
Note: Noise Blanker is available only for the main transceiver
in
SSB, CW, FSK, and AM modes.
PRE-AMPLIFIER
Switching the Pre-amplifier OFF may help reduce
interference from adjacent frequencies.
Press [PRE/LOCK A] to toggle the Pre-amplifier ON
and OFF.
"PRE" appears when the function is ON.
The ON/OFF setting will be automatically stored in
the current band. Each time you select the same
band, the same setting will be automatically selected.
The frequency range of each band is provided in the
following table (under "ATTENUATOR").
Note: If the same frequency (144 MHz or 430 (440) MHz) band
is
selected on both the main transceiver and the sub-receiver,
the
pre-amplifier can be switched ON or OFF for both receivers.
This
is because the main transceiver and sub-receiver share the
same
antenna.
ATTENUATOR
The Attenuator reduces the level of received signals.
This function is useful when there is strong
interference from adjacent frequencies.
Press [ATT/F LOCK] to toggle the Attenuator ON
and OFF.
"ATT" appears when the function is ON.
The ON/OFF setting will be automatically stored in
the current band. Each time you select the same
frequency band, the attenuator setting will be
automatically recalled.
The frequency range of each band is shown below.
Frequency bands (MHz) of 0.03 - 2.5 have pre-amplifier (default)=OFF;
attenuator=off
Frequency bands of 2.5 - 4.1 have pre-amplifier=off; attenuator=off
Frequency bands of 4.1 - 7.5 have pre-amplifier=off; attenuator=off
Frequency bands of 7.5 ~ 10.5 have pre-amplifier=on; attenuator=off
Frequency bands of 10.5 - 14.5 have pre-amplifier=on; attenuator=off
Frequency bands of 14.5 - 18.5 have pre-amplifier=on; attenuator=off
Frequency bands of 18.5 - 21.5 have pre-amplifier=on; attenuator=off
Frequency bands of 21.5 ~ 25.5 have pre-amplifier=on; attenuator=off
Frequency bands of 25.5 ~ 30.0 have pre-amplifier=on; attenuator=off
Frequency bands of 30.0 - 60.0 have pre-amplifier=on; attenuator=off
Frequency bands of 118 – 300 have pre-amplifier=on;
attenuator=off
Frequency bands of 300 – 512 have pre-amplifier=on;
attenuator=off
Frequency bands of 1240 – 1300 have pre-amplifier=always
on; attenuator=always off
Note: If the same frequency (144 MHz or 430 (440) MHz) band
is
selected on both the main transceiver and the sub-receiver,
the
attenuator can be switched ON or OFF for both receivers. This
is
because the main transceiver and sub-receiver share the same
antenna.
Available receiving frequencies in the above frequency bands
va depending on the market code. Refer to the Specifications
{page 106} for details.
If 118 135.995 MHz, 155 ~ 173.995 MHz or 220 ~ 229.995 MHz
is selected for the sub-receiver, the pre-amplifier cannot
be turned
ON (K-ype only).
MEMORY CHANNELS
The TS-2000(X) provides you with 300 memory
channels, numbered 00 to 299, for storing operating
frequency data, modes and other information.
Memory channels 00 to 289 are called Conventional
Memory Channels. Memory channels 290 to 299 are
designed for programming VFO tuning ranges and
scan ranges. The data you can store is listed below:
Conventional memory is used for storing data you
will often recall. For example, you may store the
frequency where you regularly meet your club
members.
Parameter
Channel 00-289
Channel 290-299
RX frequency
Yes
Yes* (simplex)
TX frequency
Yes
Yes* (simplex)
RX mode
Yes
Yes* (simplex)
TX mode
Yes
Yes* (simplex)
Start/end frequencies
No
Yes
Offset frequency
Yes
Yes
Shift direction
Yes
Yes
Reverse mode
Yes
Yes
RX frequency step size
Yes
Yes (simplex)
TX frequency step size
Yes
Yes (simplex)
Tone frequency
Yes
Yes
CTCSS frequency
Yes
Yes
DCS code
Yes
Yes
Tone/CTCSS/DCS mode
On/off
Yes
Yes
Memory name
Yes
Yes
Memory channel lockout
On/off
Yes*
Yes*
*Changing the data after recalling a memory channel overwrites
the
contents of the channel.
STORING DATA IN MEMORY
There are 2 methods used for storing transmitreceive
frequencies and associated data in memory channels
00 to 289. Use either method, depending on the
relationship of the receive and transmit frequencies
you store:
Simplex channels: RX frequency = TX frequency
Split-frequency channels: RX frequency TX frequency
Memory channels 290 to 299 can also be used as
simplex channels.
Note: When RIT or X IT is ON, the frequency that includes
the RIT or
XIT offset will be stored.
Simplex Channels
1. Press [A/B] to select VFO A or VFO B.
" A" or " B" appears to show which VFO
is selected.
2. Select the frequency, mode, etc. to be stored.
3. Press [M.IN] to enter Memory Scroll mode.
To exit Memory Scroll mode and abort the
storage process, press [CLR].
4. Turn the MULTI/CH control, or press Mic [UP]
or [DWN] to select a memory channel.
You can also select a channel by entering a
3-digit number, such as 012, using the
numeric keys.
5. Press [M.IN] again to store the data.
The previous data stored in the channel is
overwritten.
Split-Frequency Channels
1. Press [A/B] to select VFO A or VFO B.
"<A" or "< B" appears to show which
VFO
is selected.
2. Select the frequency, mode, etc. to be stored.
This frequency and mode will be used for
transmitting.
3. Press [A/B] to select the other VFO.
4. Select the receive frequency and mode.
5. Press [SPLIT]. "SPLIT" appears.
6. Press [M.IN] to enter Memory Scroll mode.
To exit Memory Scroll mode and abort the
storage process, press [CLR].
7. Turn the MULTI/CH control, or press Mic [UP]
or [DWN] to select a memory channel.
You can also select a channel by entering a
3-digit number, such as 012, using the
numeric keys.
8. Press [M.IN] again to store the data.
The previous data stored in the channel is
overwritten.
Note: When subtone frequencies differ between TX and RX
while performing memory-VFO sprit operation, the subtone
frequency for TX will be stored in the memory channel.
Memory Recall & Scroll
There are two modes which allow you to retrieve
frequencies and associated data that you stored in a
memory channel: Memory Recall and Memory Scroll.
Memory Recall:
In this mode, the transceiver receives and transmits
using a frequency that you retrieve. You can
temporarily change the frequency and associated
data without overwriting the contents of the memory
channel when Menu No. 06B is set to ON.
Memory Scroll:
Use this mode to check the contents of the memory
channels without changing the current receive
frequency. In this mode, frequencies you retrieve are
not used for receiving and transmitting.
Memory Recall
1. Press [VFO/M] to enter Memory Recall mode.
The memory channel that was last selected
appears.
2. Turn the MULTI/CH control, or press Mic [UP]
or [DWN] to select a memory channel.
Continuously holding down Mic [UP] or
[DWN] steps the transceiver through the
memory channels until the key is released.
Memory channels which contain no data are
skipped.
You cannot change memory channels while
transmitting.
3. To exit Memory Recall mode, press [VFO/M].
Note: Memory channels can also be changed while using the
TF-SET function.
Memory Scroll
1 Press [M.IN] to enter Memory Scroll mode.
The memory channel that was last selected
appears.
2. Turn the MULTI/CH control, or press Mic [UP]
or [DWN] to step through the memory channels.
You can also change channels by entering a
3-digit number, such as 012, using the
numeric keys, then pressing [ENT].
3. To exit Memory Scroll mode, press [CLR].
The transceiver re-displays the memory
channel or VFO frequency that was
selected before you activated Memory
Scroll.
Note: Do not press [M.IN] again after entering Memory Scroll
mode. Pressing [M.IN] results in over-writing the current
VFO
data to the memory channel you selected.
Temporary Frequency Changes
After retrieving frequencies and associated data in
Memory Recall mode, you can temporarily change
the data without overwriting the contents of the
memory channel.
1. Access Menu No. 06B and select ON.
Skip this step when changing only the
associated data (not the frequency).
2. Recall a memory channel.
3. Change the frequencies and associated data.
Use only the Tuning control to select a
frequency.
4. If necessary for future use, store the changed
data in another memory channel. Refer to
"Channel Channel Transfer" {page 61}.
Note: Memory channel data can also be changed while using
the TF-SET function.
MEMORY-VFO SPLIT OPERATION
Under "ENHANCED COMMUNICATIONS" {page 31},
you learned about split-frequency operation using two
VFOs. Recalling a split-frequency channel is another
way to perform split-frequency operation. If you
access Menu No. 06A and select ON, you can also
use a memory channel and a VFO together for this
operation, as follows:
RX: Memory channel
TX: VFO A or VFO B
RX: VFO A or VFO B
TX: Memory channel
To use a memory channel for receiving:
1. Access Menu No. 06A and select ON.
2. Press [A/B] to select the VFO that you will use for
transmitting.
"< A" or "< B" appears to show which
VFO is
selected.
3. Select the frequency for transmitting.
4. 4 Recall a memory channel by pressing [VFO/M].
5. Turn the MULTI/CH control to select a memory
channel to receive.
6. 6 Press [SPLIT].
7. The VFO A frequency appears on the sub-display.
If you want to use the VFO B frequency to
transmit, press [SPLIT] again.
8. Press [SEND] or Mic [PTT] to transmit on the
frequency shown on the sub display.
9. Press [SPLIT] to exit the SPLIT operation.
If Split operation is still selected using VFO A or
VFO B, press [SPLIT] again to exit Split
operation.
To use a memory channel for transmitting:
1. Access Menu No. 06A and select ON.
2. Recall a memory channel by pressing [MFO/M].
3. Turn the MULTI/CH control to select a memory
channel to transmit.
4. Press [VFO/M] to return to VFO mode.
5. Press [SPLIT]. The other VFO frequency appears
on the sub display for transmission (Normal SPLIT
operation).
6. Press [SPLIT] again. The memory channel you
selected in step 3 appears on the sub-display for
transmission.
7. Press [SEND] or Mic [PTT] to transmit on the
frequency in the memory channel.
8. Press [SPLIT] to exit SPLIT operation.
MEMORY TRANSFER
Memory VFO Transfer
After retrieving frequencies and associated data
from Memory Recall mode, you can copy the data
to the VFO. This function is useful, for example,
when the frequency you want to monitor is near
the frequency stored in a memory channel.
1. Recall the desired memory channel.
2. Press [M >VFO/MG.SEL]. When a simplex channel is recalled,
the
data is copied to VFO A or VFO B, depending on which VFO was
used to recall
the channel.
When a split channel is recalled, the RX
data is copied to VFO A and the TX data is
copied to VFO B.
Note:
The Memory Channel Lockout status and the subtone
frequency are not copied.
Pressing [M• VFO/MG.SEL] after temporarily changing
the
retrieved data copies the new data to the VFO.
Channel
Channel Transfer
You can also copy channel information from one
memory channel to another. This function is
useful when storing frequencies and associated
data that you temporarily change in Memory
Recall mode.
1. Recall the desired memory channel {page 59}.
2. Press [M.IN] to enter Memory Scroll mode.
To exit Memory Scroll mode, press [CLR].
3. Select the memory channel where you would
like the data copied, using the MULTI/CH
control.
4. Press [M.IN] again.
Channel 00-289
RX frequency
RX frequency
TX frequency
TX frequency
Mode for RX
Mode for RX
Mode for TX
Mode for TX
Offset frequency
Offset frequency
Shift direction
Shift direction
Reverse ON/OFF
Reverse ON/OFF
RX frequency step
RX frequency step
TX frequency step
TX frequency step
Tone frequency
Tone frequency
CTCSS frequency
CTCSS frequency
DCS code
DCS code
Tone/CTCSS/DCS
ON/OFF
Tone/CTCSS/DCS
ON/OFF
Memory Name
Memory Name
Memory Channel Lockout ON/OFF
Memory Channel Lockout OFF
Channel 00-289
Channel 290-299
RX frequency
TX/RX frequency
(simplex)
TX frequency
TX/RX frequency
(simplex)
Mode for RX
>>
Mode for TX/RX (simplex)
Mode for TX
Mode for TX/RX (simplex)
Offset frequency
Offset frequency
Shift direction
Shift direction
Reverse ON/OFF
Reverse ON/OFF
RX frequency step
TX/RX frequency step (simplex)
TX frequency step
TX/RX frequency step (simplex)
Tone frequency
Tone frequency
CTCSS frequency
CTCSS frequency
DCS code
DCS code
Tone/CTCSS/DCS
ON/OFF
Tone/CTCSS/DCS
ON/OFF
Memory Name
Memory Name
Memory Channel
Lockout ON/OFF
Memory channel Lockout OFF
Channel 290-299
Channel 00-289
TX/RX frequency
RX frequency
TX/RX frequency
TX frequency
Mode for TX/RX
Mode for RX
Mode for TX/RX
Mode for TX
Offset frequency
Offset frequency
Shift direction
Shift direction
Reverse ON/OFF
Reverse ON/OFF
TX/RX frequency step (simplex)
RX frequency step
TX/RX frequency step (simplex)
TX frequency step
Tone frequency
Tone frequency
CTCSS frequency
CTCSS frequency
DCS code
DCS code
Tone/CTCSS/DCS
ON/OFF
Tone/CTCSS/DCS
ON/OFF
Memory Name
Memory Name
Memory Channel
Lockout ON/OFF
Memory Channel
Lockout OFF
When copying a memory channel 290 ~ 299 -1
channel 290 ~ 299, Memory Channel Lockout
status changes to OFF, regardless of the original
channel settings.
The tables above illustrate how data is transferred
between memory channels.
STORING FREQUENCY RANGES
Memory channels 290 to 299 allow you to store
frequency ranges for VFO tuning and Program Scan.
Program Scan is described in the next chapter. To
tune or scan frequencies within a specified range,
store the start and end frequencies for that range in
advance.
1. Press [A/B] to select VFO A or VFO B.
2. Select the desired start frequency.
3. Press [M.IN] to enter Memory Scroll mode.
To exit Memory Scroll mode and abort the
storage process, press [CLR].
4. Turn the MULTI/CH control, or press Mic [UP] or
[DWN] to select a memory channel in the range of
290 to 299.
You can also select a channel by entering a
3-digit number, such as 290, using the
numeric keys.
5. Press [M.IN] to store the start frequency in the
memory channel.
"CLOSE INPUT" appears on the sub dot-matrix
display.
6. Turn the MAIN control or the MULTI/CH control to
select the end frequency.
7. Press [M.IN] to store the end frequency in the
memory channel.
The previous data stored in the channel is
overwritten.
Confirming Start/End Frequencies
Use this procedure to check the start and end
frequencies that you stored in channels 290 to 299.
1. Press [VFO/M] to enter Memory Recall mode.
2. Turn the MULTI/CH control, or press Mic [UP]
or [DWN] to select a memory channel from
290 to 299.
3. Press [-] to check the start frequency and [+]
to check the end frequency.
Programmable VFO
Using the start and end frequencies that you
stored in channels 290 to 299, Programmable
VFO restricts the frequency range that you can
tune with the Tuning control. One application of
this function is to help you operate within the
authorized frequency limits of your license.
1. Press [VFO/M] to enter Memory Recall mode.
2. Turn the MULTI/CH control, or press Mic [UP]
or [DWN] to select a memory channel from
290 to 299.
Now you can only tune from the start frequency to
the end frequency, using the MAIN control.
Note: Pressing [UP]/ [DWN] or turning the MULTI/CH control
results changing the memory channel number while in
Programmable VFO mode.
Memory Channel Lockout
You can lock out memory channels that you prefer
not to monitor during Memory Scan. Memory Scan is
described in the next chapter {page 68}.
1. Press [VFO/M] to enter Memory Recall mode.
2. Turn the MULTI/CH control, or press Mic [UP] or
[DWN] to select the memory channel.
3. Press [CLR] momentarily.
Pressing [CLR] for more than approximately
2 seconds erases the contents of the
memory channel.
A dot appears beside the right-most digit of the
memory channel number to indicate the
channel has been locked out.
Repeatedly pressing [CLR] toggles between
adding and removing the channel from the
scan list.
ERASING MEMORY CHANNELS
If there are memory channels that you will not recall
in the future, you may prefer erasing the contents of
those channels.
1. Press [VFO/M] to enter Memory Recall mode.
2. Turn the MULTI/CH control, or press Mic [UP] or
[DWN] to select the memory channel.
You can also select a channel by entering a
3-digit number, such as 012, using the numeric
keys.
3. Press and hold [CLR] for approximately two
seconds.
A long beep sounds to confirm that the channel
data has been erased.
MEMORY CHANNEL NAME
You can assign a name to each memory channel. A
maximum of 7 alpha-numeric characters can be
stored.
1. Press [M.IN] to enter Memory Scroll mode.
2. Turn the MULTI/CH control, or press Mic [UP] or
[DWN] to select a memory channel.
3. Press [DISP].
4. Press [+]/[-] or turn the MULTI/CH control to
select the desired alpha-numeric character. You
can move the cursor to the left by pressing
[MAIN], or to the right by pressing [SUB]. Or, you
can use an optional DTMF microphone to enter
alpha-numeric characters.
Note: Alpha-numeric entries are limited to those characters
shown in the following DTMF character table when you are using
a DTMF Mic.
5. After selecting all the necessary characters for the
memory channel name, press [M.IN] to store the
name, or press [DISP] to select a Memory Group.
You can select only one of 10 groups (0 to 9).
Enter the desired group number by pressing a
numeric key. The selected group is shown in a
larger font. After selecting a group, press [M.IN]
to store the name and group number in the
memory channel.
6. When you recall a memory channel with a name,
the name is displayed on the dot-matrix display
along with the memory channel number and group
number {page 64}.
MEMORY GROUP
To manage 300 memory channels, you can divide
them up into a maximum of 10 groups (Groups 0 to 9).
After you configure a Memory Group, you can select
one or more of the Memory Groups you want to recall,
in Memory Recall mode. As a default, all memory
channels are stored in Group 0.
To change the Memory Channel Group:
1. Press [M.IN] to enter Memory Scroll mode.
2. Select the desired memory channel for which you
want to change the Memory Group by turning the
MULTI/CH control.
3. Press [DISP]. The Memory Name input prompt appears.
4. Press [DISP] again to skip the input or enter a
Memory Name using [+]/[-] and [MAIN]/[SUB]
{page 63}. The current Memory Group appears in a larger
font.
5. Press a numeric key to change the selected
Group number. The newly selected Group
number appears in a larger font.
6. Press [M.IN] to store the settings.
Memory Group Select
After you configure Memory Groups to the Memory
Channels, you can select one or more of the Groups
to be recalled in Memory Recall mode.
To select Memory Groups:
1. Press [FUNC], [M)'VFO/MG.SEL] to enter
Memory Group Select mode.
2. Numbers 0 ~ 9 appear in the main dot-matrix
display. The selected Memory Group numbers are
displayed in larger fonts. To change the selection,
press a numeric key. To select all the Memory
Groups, press [•/DCS/SEL]. At least, one
Memory Group must be selected.
3. Press [M.IN] to save the setting and exit.
4. You can now recall only the selected Memory
Groups in Memory Recall mode.
QUICK MEMORY
Quick memory is designed to quickly and temporarily
save data without specifying a particular memory
channel. Use Quick memory to store data you will
not use in future operating sessions. For example, as
you tune across the band looking for DX, it is
convenient to store stations that you want to contact.
You can quickly jump between several different
memory channels as you monitor them.
This transceiver provides ten Quick memory channels
("0_" to "9_") that can store the following
data:
VFO A frequency and operating mode
VFO B frequency and operating mode
Sub receiver ON/OFF
Sub-receiver frequency and operating mode
RIT ON/OFF
XIT ON/OFF
RIT/XIT offset frequency
Receiver filter bandwidth
Noise Blanker ON/OFF
FINE ON/OFF
DSP Noise reduction OFF/ 1/2
DSP Beat Cancel
ON/OFF
DSP Auto Notch ON/OFF
TX/RX functions
STORING INTO QUICK MEMORY
Each time you store a new frequency, all previously
stored frequencies are bumped to the next respective
Quick memory channel. When all ten memory
channels contain frequencies, storing one more
frequency bumps the contents of memory channel 9
off the stack (the data is lost).
You can store data in the Quick Memory only when
using VFO frequencies for both transmitting and
receiving.
1. Select the frequency, mode, etc. on the main
transceiver or sub-receiver VFO.
2. Press QUICK MEMO [M.IN].
Each time QUICK MEMO [M.IN] is pressed,
the current VFO data is written to the Quick
Memory.
Note: When RIT or XlT is ON, this ON status and the offset
will
also be stored.
RECALLING QUICK MEMORY CHANNELS
You can recall a Quick Memory channel only when
using VFO frequencies for both transmitting and
receiving.
1. Press QUICK MEMO [MR].
The current memory channel number appears.
If there is no data stored in any Quick memory
channel or data cannot be recalled to the
current VFO, an error beep sounds.
2. Turn the MULTI/CH control to select a Quick
memory channel (0 to 9).
You cannot change memory channels while
transmitting.
3. To exit, press QUICK MEMO [MR] again.
Note: Memory channels cannot be changed while using the
TF-SET function.
TEMPORARY FREQUENCY CHANGES
After recalling a Quick memory channel, you can
temporarily change the data without overwriting the
contents of the channel. You can change the
frequency even when you select OFF in Menu
No. 06B.
1. Press QUICK MEMO [MR].
2. Turn the MULTI/CH control to select a Quick
memory channel (0 to 9).
3. Change the frequencies and associated data.
4.To store the changed data in the Quick memory,
press QUICK MEMO [M.IN].
This action stores the new data in the current
channel and bumps the old frequency to the
next higher Quick memory channel.
5. To exit, press QUICK MEMO [MR] again.
Note: Memory channel data can also be changed while using
the TF-SET function.
QUICK MEMORY VFO TRANSFER
This function copies the contents of the recalled
memory channel to the VFO.
1. Recall a Quick Memory channel.
2. Press [M >VFO/MG.SEL].
Note: Pressing [M>VFO/ MG.SEL] after temporarily changing
the
recalled data copies the new data to the VFO.
SCAN
Scan is a useful function for hands-off monitoring of
your favorite frequencies. By becoming comfortable
with all types of Scan, you will increase your operating
efficiency.
This transceiver provides the following types of scans.
Normal Scan
VFO Scan: Scans the entire band of the frequency you selected.
Program Scan: Scans the specific frequency ranges stored in
Memory channels 290-299
MHz Scan: Scans the frequencies within a 1 MHz range
Memory Scan
All-Channel Scan: Scans al memory channels from 00-290
Group Scan: Scans the specific memory channel groups
Call Scan
VFO: Scans the call channel and current VFO frequency
Memory Channel: Scans the Call channel and the selected Memory
channel
Visual Scan*
VFO: Scans the current operating frequency as well as a specified
number of frequencies above and
below that frequency. The signal strength of each channel
is displayed in a bar graph.
Memory channel: Scans the memory channels and displays the
signal strength of each channel in a bar
graph *Visual scan switches OFF the Automatic Simplex Checker
Note: While using C TCSS or DCS, Scan stops only for the
signals that
contain the same CTCSS tone or DCS code that you selected.
When using S-meter Squelch, Scan stops when the received
signal strength matches or exceeds the S-meter setting. Scan
resumes 2 seconds after the signal level drops below the S-meter
setting. Pressing and holding Mic [PTT] causes Scan to stop
ff it is
functioning on a non TX band. Pressing [PTT] on the scanning
band causes Scan to stop. Starting Scan switches OFF the Automatic
Simplex Checker.
NORMAL SCAN
When you are operating the transceiver in VFO mode,
2 types of scanning are available.
VFO Scan: The transceiver scans the entire band of the
frequency you selected. For example, if you are
operating and receiving on the main transceiver's
VFOA at 14.195.00 MHz, it scans all the
frequencies in the range of 30.00 kHz to
60.00000 MHz. (Refer to VFO frequency range
in the Specifications.)
Program Scan: By programming the start and end frequency
in
Memory channels 290 ~ 299 {page 62}, you can
limit the scanning frequency range. Since there
are 10 memory channels (290 ~ 299) available for
specifying the start and end frequency, you can
select one or more (a maximum of 10) ranges to
scan. This is useful when you are waiting for a DX
station on a certain frequency but the station may
appear on slightly higher or lower frequency.
VFO SCAN
VFO Scan scans the entire frequency range that is
available for the current VFO. When the Program
Scan frequency range is not programmed or no Scan
Group is selected for the Program Scan, the
transceiver also scans the entire frequency range
available for the current VFO.
If one or more Program Scan frequency ranges are
programmed in memory channels 290 to 299:
1. Press [FUNC], [SCAN/SG.SEL].
2. If one or more memory channels are selected for
the Program Scan, the selected channels are
displayed in a larger font on the main dot-matrix
display. In this case, press [?/DCS/SEL] to temporarily
deselect all the channels. When there are no Scan
Group channels selected, "VFO SCN MODE"
appears on the sub dot-matrix display.
3. Press [SCAN/SG.SEL] to return to the current
VFO mode.
4. Press [SCAN/SG.SEL] to start the VFO Scan.
Note: While scanning, you can change the scan speed by turning
the
RIT/ SUB control Turn the control clockwise/counterclockwise
to decrease/ increase the scan speed. The speed indicator
appears on the main dot-matrix display, where P1 is the fastest
speed and P9 is the slowest.
You cannot change the VFO Scan speed in FM mode.
You cannot change the VFO Scan speed on the sub-receiver.
PROGRAM SCAN
Program Scan monitors the range between the start
and end frequencies that you have stored in
Conventional memory channels 290 to 299. Refer to
"STORING FREQUENCY RANGES" {page 62} for
details on how to store the start and end frequencies.
You can select a maximum of 10 memory channels
(Memory channels 290 to 299) and sequentially scan
the ranges that you stored in these channels. Program
Scan starts with the smallest channel number and
repeats the sequence as described below.
1. Press [A/B] to select VFO A or VFO B.
If you are operating the sub-receiver, press
[VFO/M] to select VFO mode.
2. Press [FUNC], [SCAN/SG.SEL].
3. If no Program scan channel is selected, all memory
channel numbers (from 290 to 299) are displayed in
small fonts. Only the one's digit of each memory
channel is displayed on the main dot-matrix display.
0 represents channel 290, 1 represents channel 291,
2 represents channel 292, etc.
4. To select the Program scan frequency range,
press a numeric key 0 to 9. For example, press
[3] for channel 293 only or press [3], [5], [7] to
select channels 293, 295, and 297. When a
channel is selected for the Program Scan, the
number is displayed in a larger font.
To temporarily deselect all the channels (290 to 299)
so that you can perform the VFO Scan, press
[?/DCS/SEL]. (Refer to "VFO SCAN" on page 66)
Note: At least one of the valid Program Scan channels (from
290 to 299)
must be programmed and selected to perform the Program Scan.
If no Program channel is selected or available for the Program
Scan, the transceiver performs the VFO Scan.
When performing the Program Scan on the sub-receiver, the
frequencies must be within the sub-receiver frequency range
limitations. Otherwise, the Program Scan cannot be performed.
The same conditions apply to the main transceiver.
5. Press [SCAN/SG.SEL] to start the Program Scan.
To quickly move towards a desired frequency
while scanning, turn the Tuning control or the
MULTI/CH control, or press Mic [UP]/[DWN].
When in a mode other than FM mode, turning
the RIT/SUB control clockwise decreases the
scan speed, and counterclockwise increases
the speed. The current scan speed is shown
on the display; P1 is the fastest speed and P9
is the slowest.
While in FM mode, Scan automatically stops
on a frequency where a signal is present. The
transceiver will either remain on that channel
for a short time (Time-operated mode) or until
the signal drops out (Carrier-operated mode),
depending on which mode you select via Menu
No. 10 {page 68}.
6. To stop Scan, press [SCAN/SG.SEL] or [CLR].
Note: If you are operating on the sub-receiver and perform
the Program
Scan, the sub-receiver automatically skips the memory channels
that cannot be scanned on the sub-receiver. The same
conditions a/so apply to the main transceiver.
If you have turned the MAIN SQL or SUB SQL control clockwise,
far beyond the squelch threshold when in FM mode, Scan may
fall to stop at a channel where a signal is present. If this
happens, turn the MAIN SQL or SUB SQL control slightly
counterclockwise.
If you press [SCAN/SG.SEL] before storing any frequency range
for memory channels 290 to 299, the transceiver starts VFO
scan.
When the current receive frequency is within one of the ranges
that you selected with channel numbers, Scan starts with the
current frequency. The operating mode stored in the memory
channel is used.
When the current receive frequency is outside all the ranges
that
you selected with the channel numbers, Scan starts with the
start
frequency stored in the smallest channel number.
The operating mode can be changed while scanning, but the
memory channel is overwritten with the changed mode.
When the current Scan range is smaller than a single step
of the
MULTI/CH control, turning the control clockwise causes Scan
to
jump to the start frequency, and counterclockwise to the end
frequency.
Starting Program Scan switches OFF the RIT and XIT functions.
While in FM mode, the Program Scan monitors rounded off
frequencies regardless of the Menu No. 04 setting.
You cannot change the scan speed on the sub-receiver.
PROGRAM SCAN PARTIALLY SLOWED
You can specify a maximum of 5 frequency points for
each memory channel from 290 to 299 so that the
Program Scan slows down the scanning speed. To
specify the slow down frequency points, first program
the start and end frequencies into a memory channel
(290 ~ 299) {page 62}.
1. Access Menu No. 07 to set the function ON
(default is OFF).
2. You can further configure the slow down frequency
width. Access Menu No. 08 to select the range
from 100 Hz to 500 Hz (default is 300 Hz).
Note: If you select, for example, 500 Hz for Menu No. 08,
the
Program Scan slows down to a ±500 Hz width, centering
the
frequency you marked below.
3. Press [VFO/M] to recall the memory channel
(290 ~ 299) for which you want to specify the
scan slow down frequencies.
4. Press [-] or [+] to confirm the start ([-]) or end
([+]) frequency.
5. Turn the Tuning control to the center frequency
point that you want the Program Scan to slow
down. Press QUICK MEMO [M.IN] to mark the
Stow down frequency point. The "*" icon appears.
6. Repeat step 5 to specify the center slow down
frequency points. You can specify a maximum of
5 frequency points for each channel.
7. If you want to clear the slow down frequency
points that you previously stored, press and hold
QUICK MEMO [M.IN] for 1 second. A
confirmation beep sounds and the transceiver
clears all the slow down frequency points you
specified in the memory channel.
Note: You must clear all the previous slow down frequency
points; you cannot clear only specific points.
8. Press [VFO/M] to return to VFO mode.
9. Press [SCAN/SG.SEL] to start the Program Scan
with the slow down frequency point(s).
Note: During the Program Scan, you can turn the RIT/SUB control
to
adjust the scanning speed. Turn the control clockwise/ counter-
clockwise to slow down/speed up the scan. The Program Scan
speed indicator appears on the main dot-matrix display during
the Program Scan; P1 is the fastest speed and P9 is the slowest.
You cannot change the Program Scan speed in FM mode.
You cannot change the scan speed on the sub-receiver.
You cannot specify the Program Scan slow down frequency point
for FM mode.
SCAN HOLD
This function stops Program Scan for approximately
5 seconds, then resumes Scan when you jump to the
desired frequency by turning the Tuning control or the
MULTI/CH control, or by pressing Mic [UP]/[DWN].
To use this function, access Menu No. 09, and select
ON. The default is OFF.
MHz SCAN
When you operate the main transceiver or sub-
receiver in VFO mode, you can scan an entire 1 MHz
frequency range within the current VFO frequency.
1. Press [VFO/M] to select VFO mode.
2. Select the desired frequency to perform the MHz
Scan. If you want to scan the entire 145 MHz
frequency, for example, select 145.650 MHz.
Scan will operate between 145.00000 MHz and
145.99999 MHz.
3. Press and hold [1MHz/SEL] to start the MHz Scan.
4. Turn the RIT/SUB control to adjust the scan speed.
5. To stop the MHz Scan, press [SCAN/SG.SEL] or [CLR].
Note: You cannot change the MHz Scan speed in FM mode.
You cannot change the scan speed on the sub-receiver.
MEMORY SCAN
Memory Scan monitors all memory channels in which
you have stored frequencies (All-channel Scan) or only
a desired group of memory channels (Group Scan).
Scan automatically stops at a channel where a signal
is present, regardless of the operating mode. The
transceiver will either remain on that channel for a
short time (Time-operated mode) or until the signal
drops out (Carrier-operated mode). Use Menu No. 10
to select either mode. The default is Time-operated.
SCAN RESUME METHOD
The transceiver stops scanning at the frequency (or
memory channel) where a signal is detected. It then
continues scanning according to which resume mode
you have selected. You can choose one of the
following modes. The default is Time-operated mode.
Time-Operated mode
The transceiver remains on a busy frequency (or
memory channel) for approximately 6 seconds,
then continues to scan, even if the signal is still
present.
Carrier-Operated mode
The transceiver remains on the busy frequency (or
memory channel) until the signal drops out. There
is a 2 second delay between signal dropout and
scan resumption.
1. Press [MENU] to enter Menu mode.
2. Turn the MULTI/CH control to select Menu No. 10.
3. Press [+]/[-] to select TO (Time-Operated) or CO Carrier-Operated).
4. Press [MENU] to complete the setting and exit Menu mode.
You can lock out the memory channels that you
prefer not to monitor while scanning. To do this, refer
to "Memory Channel Lockout" {page 62}.
ALL-CHANNEL SCAN
Use the following procedure to scan all the memory
channels that contain frequency data in sequence,
ignoring the Memory Group number.
1. Select Time-operated or Carrier-operated mode via Menu
No. 10.
2. Press [VFO/M] to enter Memory Recall mode.
3. Turn the MAIN SQL or SUB SQL control to adjust the squelch
threshold.
4. Press [FUNC], [SCAN/SG.SEL] to enter Scan Group Select
mode.
The selected Groups appear in a larger font.
5. Press [·/DCS/SEL] to deselect all Groups so that
the transceiver scans the memory channel
sequentially, ignoring the Memory Group number
data.
6. Press [SCAN/SG.SEL] to return to Memory Recall mode.
7. Press [SCAN/SG.SEL] to start All-channel Scan.
Scan starts from the current memory channel
and ascends up through the channel numbers
(scan direction cannot be changed).
To jump to a desired channel while scanning,
turn the MULTI/CH control, or press Mic
[UP]/[DWN].
8. To stop Scan, press [SCAN] or [CLR].
Note: If you are operating on the sub-receiver and perform
the Memory
Scan, the transceiver automatically skips the memory channels
that cannot be received by the sub-receiver. The same
conditions apply to the main transceiver.
If you have turned the MAIN SQL or SUB SQL control clockwise,
far beyond the squelch threshold, Scan may fail to stop at
a
channel where a signal is present, if this happens, turn the
SQL
control slightly counterclockwise.
Starting Memory Scan switches OFF the RIT and XIT functions.
GROUP SCAN
For the purpose of Group Scan, the 300 memory
channels can be divided into 10 groups so that you
can select one or more groups to be scanned,
depending on the situation.
When you store frequency data in a memory channel
{page 58}, the transceiver automatically adds the
default Group 0 (zero), to the memory channel data.
To recall the existing memory channel data and
revise the Group number:
1. Press [M.IN] to enter Memory Scroll mode.
2. Select the desired memory channel by turning the MULTI/CH
control.
3. Press [DISP]. The Memory Name input prompt appears.
Press [DISP] again to skip the input or enter a
Memory Name using [+]/[-] and [MAIN]/
[SUB] {page 63}.
4. Press the desired Group number ([0] to [9]) using
the numeric keypad. The selected Group number
appears in a larger font.
Note: You can select only one of 10 groups (0 to 9) for each
memory channel
5. Press [M.IN] to store and overwrite the new
channel data to the memory channel.
6. Repeat steps 2 through 6 for each memory
channel you want to assign to a specific group.
You can select a maximum of 10 groups and
sequentially scan the channels that belong to those
groups. Group Scan starts with the smallest group
number and repeats the sequence, for example,
group 3 group 5 group 7 group 3.
1. Select Time-operated or Carrier-operated mode
via Menu No. 10.
2. Press [VFO/M] to enter Memory Recall mode.
3. Turn the MAIN SQL or SUB SQL control to adjust
the squelch threshold.
4. Press [FUNC], [SCAN/SG.SEL] to enter Scan
Group Select mode. Then, using the numeric
keypad, enter the group numbers you want to
scan. i.e.- Press [3] for group 3, or press [3], [5],
[7] for groups 3, 5, and 7. The selected Memory
Groups appear in a larger font.
5. Press [SCAN/SG.SEL.] to exit Scan Group Select
mode.
6. Press [SCAN/SG.SEL] again to start Memory
Group Scan.
Scan ascends up through the channel numbers
(scan direction cannot be changed).
To jump to a desired channel while scanning,
turn the MULTI/CH control or press Mic
[UP]/[DWN].
7. To stop Scan, press [SCAN/SG.SEL] or [CLR].
After using Group Scan, press [FUNC],
[SCAN/SG.SEL], then [·/DCS/SEL] to deselect all
the Group numbers you selected in step 4. This
returns you to All-channel Scan (factory default).
Note: If you are operating on the sub-receiver and perform
the Group
Scan, the transceiver automatically skips the memory channels
that cannot be received by the sub-receiver. The same
conditions apply to the main transceiver.
If you have turned the MAIN SQL or SUB SQL control clockwise,
far beyond the squelch threshold, Scan may fail to stop at
a
channel in which a signal is present. If this happens, turn
the
SQL control slightly counterclockwise.
When the current channel is within one of the groups that
you
selected, Scan starts with the current channel.
When the current channel is outside aft the groups that you
selected, Scan starts with the group number that is larger
than
and closest to the group number of the current channel.
Starting Memory Scan switches OFF the RIT and XIT functions.
CALL SCAN
A Call channel can be stored for each operating
band, such as HF, 50 MHz, 144 MHz, 430 (440) MHz
and 1.2 GHz (TS-2000 Optional) bands. You can
monitor one of these Call channels and the current
operating frequency alternatively.
1. Select the frequency you want to monitor.
In VFO mode, press [A/B] to select VFO A or B
for the main transceiver or press [SUB] or
[CTRL] to select the sub-receiver VFO. Then,
turn the Tuning control or the MULTI/CH
control to select the desired frequency.
In Memory Recall mode, press [VFO/M] to
select the memory channel you want to monitor
by turning the MULTI/CH control.
2. Press [CALL/C.IN] to recall the Call channel for
the frequency band.
3. Press [SCAN/SG.SEL].
4. The Call channel and the selected VFO frequency
or memory channel are monitored alternatively.
To stop Scan, press [SCAN/SG.SEL] or [CLR].
VISUAL SCAN
While you are receiving, Visual Scan allows you to
monitor frequencies near the current operating
frequency. Visual Scan graphically displays how all
frequencies in the selected range are busy. You will
see a maximum of 7 segments, for each frequency
(channel) point that represent relative S-meter levels.
Determine the scan range by selecting the center
frequency and the number of channels. The default
number of channels is 61.
Using Visual Scan (VFO)
1. Select the desired band for Visual Scan.
2. Turn the Tuning control, or press Mic [UP]/
[DWN], to select the operating frequency.
This frequency will be used as the center
frequency.
3. Press and hold [DISP] for approximately
1 second to start Visual Scan (VFO).
The center frequency is displayed on the
main frequency display and the current
scanning frequency is displayed on the sub
frequency display. The operating mode and
the number of channels to be scanned are
displayed on the main dot-matrix display.
The sub dot-matrix display shows the
relative S-meter level of each frequency
point, vertically.
To pause Scan, press [DISP]. "P" appears
on the main dot-matrix display. While the
Visual Scan is paused, you can monitor the
paused frequency. Press [DISP] again to
resume the Visual Scan.
4. To change the current scanning frequency, turn
the Tuning control or press Mic [UP]/[DWN].
The displayed frequency changes and the
cursor moves.
Press [1MHz/SEL] to make the current
scanning frequency the new center
frequency.
You can move the frequency using the MAIN
control. If you want to revert to the original
center frequency, press [FM/AM/NAR].
5. To quit Visual Scan, press [CLR] or
[SCAN/SG.SEL].
Changing the Number of Channels to Scan
1. Press [MENU] to enter Menu mode.
2. Turn the MULTI/CH control to select Menu No. 11.
3. Press [+] or [-] to select 31, 61 (default), 91 or
181 channels for the number of channels to scan.
4. Press [MENU] to exit Menu mode.
Note: The current frequency step of the MULTI/CH control is
used
for the Visual Scan.
While performing the Visual Scan, the DUAL WATCH
function {page 47} is temporarily disabled unless you are
using the 144 MHz or 430 (440) MHz in FM or AM mode and
the Control Band for the main transceiver.
If you start the Visual Scan from the frequency on the sub-
receiver, the frequency is transferred to the main display,
then the Visual Scan starts.
If you start the Visual Scan in Memory Recall mode, the
memory channel frequencies will be scanned.
If the frequency range specified for Program Scan or
Program VFO is narrower than the range specified for Visual
Scan, the range for Program Scan or VFO will be used for
Visual Scan.
Visual Scan stops when you transmit.
Depending on the transceiver conditions, Visual Scan and
the S-meter level may differ.
Using Visual Scan (Memory Channel)
1. Press [MENU] to enter Menu mode.
2. Turn the MULTI/CH control to select Menu No. 11.
3. Press [+] or [-] to select 31, 61 (default), 91 or
181 channels for the number of channels to scan.
4. Press [VFO/M] to enter Memory Recall mode.
5. 5 Press and hold [DISP] for approximately
1 second to start Visual Scan (Memory Channel).
The center memory channel number is
displayed on the main frequency display
and the current scanning frequency is
displayed on the sub frequency display.
The operating mode of the center memory
channel and the number of channels to be
scanned are displayed on the main dot-
matrix display. The sub dot-matrix display
shows the relative S-meter level of each
frequency point, vertically.
To pause Scan, press [DISP]. "P" appears
on the main dot-matrix display. While the
Visual Scan is paused, you can monitor the
paused frequency. Press [DISP] again to
resume the Visual Scan.
6. To change the current scanning frequency,
turn the MULTI/CH control or press Mic
[UP]/[DWN].
The displayed memo channel number
changes and the cursor moves.
Press [1MHz/SEL] to make the current
scanning frequency the new center
scanning channel.
7. To quit Visual Scan, press [CLR] or [SCAN/SG.SEL].
Operator conveniences
ALT (Auto Lock Tuning)
The ALT (Auto Lock Tuning) allows the transceiver to
adjust the center receiving frequency automatically
when you operate on the 1.2 GHz band in FM mode.
When the receiving audio signal is distorted or breaking
up, turn this function on to adjust the center receiving
frequency. Some old 1.2 GHz transceivers do not have
stable and precise oscillating circuits and tend to be
slightly off (drifted from) the displayed frequency.
Press [FUNC], [XIT/ALT] to toggle the ALT function
ON or OFF.
"ALT" appears when the function is ON.
Note: The ALT (Auto Lock Tuning) works only on the 1.2 GHz
band
in FM mode.
ANTENNAS
HF/50 MHz Band
Two antenna connectors are available for the HF/
50 MHz band on the rear panel {page 13}. When you
operate the main transceiver on these frequencies,
you can select one of 2 antennas.
Press [FUNC], [AT/ANT1/2] to select ANT 1 or ANT 2
for the main transceiver.
"ANT 1" or "ANT 2" appears to indicate
which
antenna is selected.
The ANT 1/ANT 2 setting will automatically be stored
in the antenna band memory. Next time you select
the same band, the same antenna will be
automatically selected.
Antenna Selection Frequency Range
0.03 ~ 2.5
2.5 ~ 4.1
4.1 ~ 7.5
7.5 ~ 10.5
10.5 ~ 14.5
14.5 ~ 18.5
18.5 ~ 21.5
21.5 ~ 25.5
25.5 ~ 30.0
30.0 ~ 60.0
Note: Connect an external antenna tuner to the ANT 1 connector
only, then select ANT 1. The internal tuner will be automatically
bypassed when the transceiver is switched ON.
VHF/UHF/1.2 GHz Band
When you select the VHF, UHF, or 1.2 GHz (TS-2000/
TS-B2000 optional) band on the main transceiver
and/or the sub-receiver, the following antenna is
automatically selected based on the operating
frequencies.
Main transceiver (MHz)
SUB-receiver (MHz)
ANT 144
142 ~ 152 (K-type)
144 ~ 146 (All E-types)
118 ~ 174 (K-type)
220 ~ 300 (K-type)
144 ~ 146 (All E-types)
ANT 430
420 ~ 450 (K-type)
430 ~ 440 (All E-types)
300 ~ 512 (K-type)
430 ~ 440 (All E-types)
ANT 1.2G
1240 ~ 1300 (All types)
N/A
Note: The same antenna is shared and used when the main
transceiver and sub-receiver are on the same band. The frequency
coverage varies depending on the market codes.
APO (Auto Power OFF)
You can set the TS-2000(X) to switch OFF
automatically if no keys or controls are pressed or
adjusted for a certain period of time. 1 minute before
the transceiver switches OFF, "CHECK" is output
in
Morse code. You can select the time from OFF, 60,
120, and 180 minutes.
Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/CH control to
access Menu No. 57.
Select the APO time from OFF, 60, 120, or 180
minutes.
Note: The APO function works even if the transceiver is scanning.
The APO timer starts counting down the timer when no key
presses, no control adjustments, and no command (RS-232C
port) sequences are detected.
AUTOMATIC ANTENNA TUNER
As explained in "ANTENNA CONNECTION" {page 1},
matching the impedance of the coaxial cable and
antenna is important. To adjust the impedance
between the antenna and the transceiver, you have
the choice of using the internal tuner or an external
tuner. This section describes how to use the internal
tuner. For the external tuner, consult the instruction
manual that comes with the tuner.
1. Select the transmit frequency.
2. Press [FUNC], [AT/ANT1/2] to select ANT 1 or ANT 2.
If an external tuner is connected to the ANT 1
connector, select ANT 2 to use the internal
antenna tuner. The internal antenna tuner is
automatically bypassed if an external antenna
tuner is connected to ANT 1.
3. Press [AT/ANT1/2] momentarily.
"ATW" appears, indicating that the internal
tuner is in-line (not bypassed).
4. Press [AT/ANT1/2] for more than one second.
CW mode is selected and tuning begins.
"z" blinks and the MAIN band LED lights red.
To cancel tuning, press [AT/ANT1/2] again.
If the SWR of the antenna system is extremely
high (more than 10:1), an alarm ("SWR" in
Morse code) sounds and the internal tuner is
bypassed. Before attempting to tune again,
adjust the antenna system to lower the SWR.
5. See the display and check that tuning has
successfully finished.
If the tuning was successful, "ATTX" stops
blinking and the MAIN band red LED turns off.
If tuning does not finish within approximately
20 seconds, an alarm ("5" in Morse code)
sounds. Press [AT/ANT1/2] to stop the alarm
and tuning.
If you access Menu No. 27 and select ON, received
signals will also pass through the internal tuner.
When this function is ON, "RX AT" appears. This
may
reduce interference on the receive frequency.
Note: The internal tuner will not tune outside the available
transmission
frequency limits.
Pressing [AT/ANT1/2] for more than one second while
transmitting, interrupts transmitting and starts tuning.
If you would like to use a separate receiving antenna, access
Menu No. 18 and switch it ON. When this function is ON,
received signals bypass the internal antenna tuner.
While using CW Full Break-in, the internal tuner will be in-line
for
both transmitting and receiving.
Tuning automatically turns OFF in approximately 60 seconds.
"AT" disappears and the error beeps stop.
Tuning may still continue when the SWR meter indicates 1:1.
This happens due to the tuning algorithm; this is not a
malfunction.
Even though the SWR meter shows more than one segment, the
internal tuner may not retune. This happens because of an
SWR
calculation algorithm tolerance between 10 W (approx.) transmit
power for tuning and 100 W transmit power.
If tuning does not finish even though the SWR meter indicates
smaller than 3:1, adjust the antenna system to lower the SWR,
then attempt to tune again.
Tuning may not reach an SWR of 1:1, depending on the
transceiver conditions.
Presetting
After each successful tuning session, the AT
Preset memory function stores the position of the
tuning capacitor in the memory. The position of
the capacitor is stored for each of the antenna
tuner bands (see the following table) and for each
antenna connector (ANT 1 and ANT 2).
Press [AT/ANT1/2] momentarily.
"ATTX" will appear, showing that the internal
tuner is in-line (not bypassed).
Each time you go across the antenna tuner
band, the AT Preset memory is automatically
recalled to position the tuning capacitor without
the need for retuning. If no preset data exists
for a particular band/antenna combination, then
the default data of 50 is used.
Note: Tuning may restart in order to obtain the optimum
matching condition even though the current antenna tuner band
has the preset data.
ATTENUATOR
The attenuator function is useful when extremely
strong signals exist nearby your receiving frequency.
When these type of signals exist nearby your
receiving frequency, the AGC function may be
erroneously controlled by the strong signals, rather
than by the target receiving signal. If this happens,
the target receiving signal can be masked and buried
by the strong signals. In this case, turn the
Attenuator function ON.
1. Press [ATT/F LOCK].
2. "ATT" appears.
To return to the normal operation, press [ATT/F LOCK] again.
Note: If the same band is selected for both the main transceiver
and
the sub-receiver, the Attenuator function is on for both receivers.
AUTO MODE
You can configure a maximum of 29 points (HF/
50 MHz), 9 points (144 MHz band), 9 points (430
(440) MHz band), and 9 points (1.2 GHz band) of the
main transceiver VFO (VFO A and B) frequencies to
change the operating mode automatically when you
change the frequency.
As a default, the following modes are programmed on
each operating band.
HF/50 MHz band
0.03 ~ 9.5 MHz: LSB
9.5 MHz - 60 MHz: USB
144 MHz band
142 - 152 MHz: FM
430 (440) MHz band
420 - 450 MHz: FM
1.2 GHz band (optional)
1240 - 1300 MHz: FM
To add the frequency points to the Auto Mode
selection:
1. Press and hold [USB/LSB/AUTO] + [ b ] to turn
the transceiver ON.
2. Press [+] or [-] to select the band to add the
frequency points.
3. 3 Select a memory channel number by turning the
MULTI/CH control.
4. 4 Turn the MAIN control to select a desired
frequency point to change the operating mode.
Or, press [ENT] to enter the desired frequency
point {page 37} using the numeric keys.
5. Press one of the mode keys to select the desired
operating mode.
The selected mode appears on the main dot-
matrix display.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 until you have added all the
data.
7. Press [CLR] to store the data.
The table below shows the default Auto Mode
frequency points for the HF/50 MHz band. When
you activate the Auto Mode selection by pressing
[FUNC], [LSB/USB/AUTO], the transceiver
automatically selects the mode; LSB for frequencies
below 9.5 MHz and USB for frequencies greater than
or equal to 9.5 MHz.
Channel no.
Data
Operating Mode
0
1.62 MHz LSB
0.03 MHz ? LSB < 9.5 MHz
9.5 MHz ? USB ? 60.0 MHz
1
9.5 MHz LSB
2
9.5 MHz LSB
3
9.5 MHz LSB
28
9.5 MHz LSB
The table below is an example of how to add the
frequency point of 1.62 MHz/AM into memory. With
this set up, the transceiver selects AM mode below
1.62 MHz, LSB mode from 1.62 MHz to 9.5 MHz and
USB mode from 9.5 MHz to 60.0 MHz.
Channel No.
Data
Operating Mode
0
1.62 MHz AM
0.03 MHz
<AM <
1.62 MHz
1.62 MHz
_< LSB <
9.5 MHz
9.5 MHz
_< USB <
60.0 MHz
1
9.5 MHz LSB
2
9.5 MHz LSB
3
9.5 MHz LSB
28
9.5 MHz LSB
The next table is an example of adding 4 frequency
points into memory. With this setup, the transceiver
selects AM mode below 1.62 MHz, CW mode from
1.62MHz to 2.0 MHz, LSB mode from 2.0 MHz to
9.5 MHz, FM mode from 9.5 MHz to 53.0 MHz and
USB mode from 53.0 MHz to 60 MHz. If multiple data
contains the same frequency but a different mode is
entered into memory, the lowest numbered memory
channel is reflected as the Auto Mode.
Channel No.
Data
Operating mode
0
1.62 MHz AM
0.03 MHz
<AM <
1.62 MHz
1.62 MHz
<CW<
2.0 MHz
2.0 MHz
< LSB <
9.5MHz
9.5 MHz
<FM<
53.0 MHz
53.0 MHz
< USB <
60.0 MHz
1
2.0 MHz CW
2
7.0 MHz LSB
3
9.5 MHz LSB
28
53.0 MHz FM
To activate the AUTO MODE function, press [FUNC],
[LSB/USB/AUTO].
BEEP FUNCTION
The Beep function provides you confirmation of entry,
error status, and malfunctions of the transceiver.
Although you can turn the beep function OFF by
accessing Menu No. 12, we recommend you leave it
ON in order to detect unexpected errors and
malfunctions.
You can also change the output level of the beeps by
accessing Menu No. 12 and selecting 1 to 9.
The transceiver generates Morse code to tell you
which mode is selected when you change operating
modes.
When you change operating Modes, the following
Morse code sounds:
Mode
Morse Code Output
LSB
L
USB
U
CW
C
CW-R
CR
FSK
R
FSK-R
RR
AM/AMN
A
FM/FMN
F
The transceiver also generates the following warning,
confirmation, and malfunction beeps.
Beeps
What it means
A high pitched short beep
A valid key is pressed
A high pitched long beep
A key entry is accepted. Scan starts, or AT tune has completed.
A low pitched short beep
An invalid operation is performed
"UL" in morse code
The internal PLL circuit unlock status is detected
"S" in morse code
CW auto tune cannot be completed, or an invalid frequency
is entered.
"5" in morse code
AT Tune cannot be completed within the specified time
"SWR" in morse code
The antenna's SWR is too high (over 10:1) to perform AT Tune
"CHECK" in morse code
1 minute before the APO (Auto Power Off) function switches
the transceiver off.
"BT" in morse code
Waiting for a CW message to be recorded
"AR" in morse code
The current message memory is full.
CALL CHANNEL
A CALL channel is a frequency that is often used
when looking for a station with which to make contact
in FM mode. Each frequency band (HF, 50 MHz,
144 MHz, 430 (440) MHz, and 1.2 GHz) has one
CALL channel. The default CALL frequencies are
shown below.
To recall the CALL channel:
1. Press [CALL/C.IN].
2. Press [CALL/C.IN] again to return to the previous
operating frequency.
To revise the default CALL channel frequency:
1. Select a new CALL frequency and operating mode
on the VFO.
2. Press [FUNC], [CALL/C.IN] to copy the new
frequency and mode to the CALL channel.
Band
Default CALL channel frequency and Mode
HF
29.6 MHz/FM
50 MHz
51.0 MHz/FM
144 MHz
144.00 MHz/FM
430 (440) MHz
430.0 MHz*, 440 MHz**/FM
1.2 GHz
1240 MHz/FM
DISPLAY
BRIGHTNESS
The brightness of the LCD display can be selected
from OFF, and 1 to 4 by accessing Menu No. 00.
1. Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/CH control to
access Menu No. 00.
2. Press [+]/[-] to select OFF, 1,2, 3, or 4.
3. Press [MENU] to store the setting and exit Menu
mode.
CONTRAST
The contrast of the LCD dot-matrix display can be
selected from 1 to 16 by accessing Menu No. 59.
1. Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/CH control to
access Menu No. 59.
2. Press [+]/[-] to select an appropriate contrast
from 1 to 16.
3. Press [MENU] to store the setting and exit Menu
mode.
KEY ILLUMINATION
The front panel key illumination can be switched ON
or OFF.
1. Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/CH control to
access Menu No. 01.
2. Press [+]/[-] to select ON or OFF.
3. Press [MENU] to store the setting and exit Menu
mode.
DTMF
MANUAL DTMF DIALING
If you have an optional MC-52DM microphone, you
can send DTMF tones while you are transmitting.
To send a series of DTMF tones:
1. Press Mic [PTT] or [SEND] on the front panel.
2. Press the desired DTMF keys to transmit.
DTMF tones are monitored through the speaker.
3. Release Mic [PTT] or press [SEND] to return to
receive mode.
DTMF MEMORY
Entering DTMF tones
The transceiver has 10 DTMF Memory Channels.
Each channel can store a series of 16 DTMF tones.
You can also name each DTMF entry using a
maximum of 8 alpha-numeric characters.
1. Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/CH control to
access Menu No. 45.
2. Press [SUB] to access Menu No. 45A.
3. Press [SUB] again to enter DTMF Memory
4.Select a DTMF Memory Channel (0 to 9) using the
5. MULTI/CH control.
Press [SUB] to enter the desired memory name.
Use [+] or [-] to select the characters. Press
[MAIN] or [SUB] to move the cursor left or right
while entering the DTMF memory name. You can
also use the Mic DTMF keys to enter the
characters. Refer to the table on page 63 for the
available characters and numbers.
6. Press [M.IN] to store the name into memory.
7. Select the desired DTMF tone using [+] or H,
then press [SUB] to move the cursor to the right to
enter the next DTMF tone.
8. Repeat step 7 until you enter all the desired DTMF
tones. You can enter a maximum of 16 DTMF
tones for each DTMF Memory Channel.
9. Press [M.IN] to store the data into memory.
Transmitting DTMF Memory Channel Data
To send the DTMF Memory Channel data while you
are transmitting:
1. Press QUICK MEMO [MR] while you are
transmitting.
2. The DTMF Memory Channel number and the
memory name appear on the main dot-matrix
display.
3. Turn the MULTI/CH control to select the DTMF
Memory Channel you want to transmit.
4. Press QUICK MEMO [MR] to transmit the DTMF
tones.
The DTMF tones are monitored through the
speaker while they are transmitted.
DTMF Tone Time Length
When transmitting a series of DTMF tones, each tone
duration is set to the 50 ms (tone)/50 ms (mute)
format as default. Some repeaters or auto patch
controllers may require longer DTMF tones and mutes.
1. Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/CH control to
access Menu No. 45B.
2. Press [-] to select SLOW.
3. Press [MENU] to exit the Menu mode.
The DTMF tones will now be sent using the 100 ms
(tone)/100 ms (mute) format.
DTMF Pause Period
In the DTMF Memory, you can enter blanks (pauses)
among a series of DTMF tones. The default pause
period is set to 500 ms, but you can change this
value by accessing Menu No. 45C.
1. Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/CH control to
access Menu No. 45C.
2. Press [+] or [-] to select the desired DTMF Pause
period (default is 500 ms).
3. Press [MENU] to exit the Menu mode.
HF RX ANTENNA
If you have a separate HF antenna (below 30 MHz)
only for receiving, connect the antenna coaxial cable
to the HF RX ANT connector on the rear panel. This
connector is considered to be connected to a
beverage antenna or directional loop antenna for low-
band operation.
To use the HF RX ANTENNA connector, access
Menu No. 18 and select ON. When the HF RX
ANTENNA is selected for receiving, "EXT" appears
on
the display.
LINEAR AMPLIFIER CONTROL
When you connect an external HF linear amplifier
to the TS-2000(X) transceiver using the REMOTE
connector, select 1 (fast switching/10 ms delay) or
2 (slow switching/25 ms delay) to activate the
internal relay so you can interface with the HF
linear amplifier {page 94}.
Some linear amplifiers require a long transmission
delay time because of the slow antenna relay
switching time. In this case, select 2 for the slow
switching.
If you have 50 MHz, 144 MHz, 430 (440) MHz, or
1.2 GHz band linear amplifiers, connect the linear
amplifier control cable to the EXT.CONT connector
for these bands {page 96}.
1. Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/CH control
to select Menu No. 28A (HF), 28B (50 MHz),
28C (144 MHz), 28D (430 (440) MHz), or
28E (1.2 GHz).
2. Press [+] or [-] to select OFF, 1, or 2.
OFF disables the TS-2000(X) relay.
1 is 10 ms transmission delay.
2 is 25 ms transmission delay.
Note: If CW full break-in is enabled, 10 ms transmission
delay is
applied regardless of the Menu No. 28 settings.
LOCK FUNCTIONS
FREQUENCY LOCK FUNCTION
Frequency Lock disables some keys and controls to
prevent you from accidentally activating a function or
changing the current settings.
Press [FUNC], [ART/F LOCK] to toggle Frequency
Lock ON or OFF. "F LOCK" appears when this function
is ON.
The following keys and controls are disabled by Frequency
Lock:
Tuning control
MULTI/CH control
A/B
A=B
CALL
CLR
CW/FSK
DISP
ENT
FM/AM
LSB/USB/AUTO
M.IN
M >VFO
QUICK MEMO [M.IN]
QUICK MEMO [MR]
SATL
SCAN/SG.SEL
SPLIT
UP/DOWN
VFO/M
1MHz/SEL
1/CH1/REC
2/CH2/REC
3/CH3/REC
9/FINE/STEP
+/-
Note: After activating Frequency Lock, the MULTI/CH control
and
[+]/[-] are still available in Menu mode.
After activating Frequency Lock, you can still change the
transmit
frequency with the Tuning control while in TF-SET mode.
After activating Frequency Lock, the MULTI,/CH control is
still
available for selections other than frequency and memory
channel changes.
After activating Frequency Lock, [CLR] may be available in
some
situations.
LOCK ALL FUNCTION
The Lock All function disables all the keys and
controls on the TS-2000 transceiver, except [FUNC],
[PRE/LOCK A], Mic [PTT] and [FUNC],
[ART/F LOCK].
Press [FUNC], [PRE/LOCK A] to toggle the Lock All
function ON or OFF.
"LOCK A" appears when this function is ON.
To return to normal operation, press [FUNC],
[PRE/LOCK A].
MICROPHONE PF KEYS
When using the optional MC-47 or MC-52DM
microphone, you can customize the functions of the
Mic [PF]/PF1, [MR]/PF2, [VFO]/PF3, and [CALL]/
PF4 keys. You can assign the following types of
Directly select a Menu No. without pressing
[MENU] and turning the MULTI/CH control.
Activate the same function as one of the front
panel keys.
One of the following functions can be assigned to
each PF key. Selecting OFF assigns no function to
the PF key.
A.N.
ANT1/2
A=B
A/B
B.C.
CALL
CH1
CH2
CH3
CLR CTRL
CW TUNE
DSP
MONI
FINE
M.IN
M.IN(QUICK MEMO)
MR (QUICK MEMO)
M>VFO
MENU Number
NB
N.R.
OFF
1MHz
RX MONI
SCAN
SPLIT
TF-SET
VFO/M
VOICE1
VOICE2
MONITOR
When you are receiving while the squelch function is
ON, weak signals become intermittent.
Or, if the CTCSS function is ON, you may want to
disable the squelch function temporarily to monitor
the current channel activities.
In these cases, use the MONITOR function to disable
the squelch function temporarily.
To assign the MONITOR function to a [PF] key on the
front panel:
1. Press [MENU] and turn the MULTI/CH control to
access Menu No. 51A.
2. Press [+] or [-] to select RX MONI.
3. Press [MENU] to exit Menu mode.
Note: You can also assign the MONITOR function to a
programmable function key on an optional MC-47 microphone.
PF KEY
You can program the front panel [PF] key to assign a
function that you frequently use. The default is Voice
1 for the optional Voice Synthesizer, VS-3 {page 91}.
You can assign one of the functions in
"MICROPHONE PF KEYS" to this PF key, accessing
Menu No. 51A.
RISE TIME OF CW
The rise time of a CW signal is the time for the RF
output to rise to its maximum power after the key is
closed. The default setting, 6 ms, is fine for slow to
medium keying speed and normal weighting (dot/
dash ratio). The 4, 2 or 1 ms settings are good for
faster keying speeds.
Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/CH control to
access Menu No. 32.
Press [+] or [-] to select the desired rise time
(default is 6 ms).
Press [MENU] to store the setting and exit Menu
mode.
RX DSP EQUALIZER
EQUALIZING RECEIVING AUDIO (SSB/FM/AM)
Use Menu No. 20 to change the receiver frequency
responses of the target signal. You can select one
from six different receiver profiles including the
default flat response. Selecting any of the following
items from the Menu causes "EQ R" to appear on
the display.
Off (OFF):
The default frequency response for SSB, FM, and AM.
High boost (H BOOST): Emphasizes higher audio frequencies;
effective for
a bassy voice.
Formant pass (F PASS): Improves clarity by suppressing audio
frequencies
outside the normal voice frequency range.
Bass boost (B BOOST): Emphasizes lower audio frequencies;
effective for
a voice with more high frequency components.
Conventional (CONVEN): Emphasizes by 3 dB frequencies at
600 Hz and
higher.
User (USER): Reserved for the ARCP software. Off is
programmed at the factory as a default.
SEPERATE SPEAKER OUTPUT
The TS-2000(X) has 2 independent receivers and is
capable of receiving 2 different frequencies at the
same time. If no external speaker is connected to the
TS-2000(X), both audio signals are mixed internally,
then output through the internal speaker.
1. Connect the external speaker(s) to the EXT.SP1
and/or EXT.SP2 jack on the rear panel {page 2}.
2. Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/CH control to
access Menu No. 16.
3. Press [+] or [-] to select 0, 1 or 2.
4. Press [MENU] to store the setting.
Menu Selection
L-Channel
R-channel
0
Main and Sub Mixed
Main and Sub Mixed
1
Main
Sub
2
Main + ¼ Sub
Sub + ¼ Main
If you are using an external speaker on EXT.SP2, you
can configure the transceiver to make a separate
output for each receiver.
EXT.SP1
EXT.SP2
Output
Internal SP (L)
SP1 (L)
SP2 (R)
-
-
>
?
N/A
N/A
?
-
>
Mutes
?
?
-
?
>
?
N/A
N/A
?
?
>
Mutes
?
?
If you want to reverse the output:
1. Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/CH control to
access Menu No. 17.
2. Press [+] to select ON.
3. Press [MENU] to store the setting and exit Menu
mode.
The output is now reversed.
Note: If you are using headphones, the transceiver mutes.
The left
channel represents the internal SP or EXT.SP1 and the right
channel
represents the EXT.SP2.
S-METER SQUELCH
The S-meter Squelch function opens the squelch only
when the receiving signal has the same or greater
strength than the S-meter Squelch setting. This
function helps you to not open the squelch when
receiving weak signals that you do not want to hear.
1. Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/CH control to
access Menu No. 19A.
2. Press [+] to select ON.
3. Turn the MAIN SQL control and/or the SUB SQL
control to adjust the S-meter Squelch threshold
level. When you turn SQL control, the indicators
on the S-meter move accordingly.
4. Press [MENU] to store the settings and exit Menu
mode.
Note: The squelch threshold level of the S-meter squelch
(both
MAIN and SUB SQL) is around the 9 o'clock position for FM
(both
MAIN and SUB SQL), the 11 o'clock position for other modes
(MAIN SQL), and the 9 o'clock position for AM (SUB SQL),
regardless of the SQL controls position.
SQUELCH HANG TIME
You can adjust the squelch hang time to continuously
monitor unstable signals. When the signal is
temporarily weaker than the S-meter Squelch
threshold level, the squelch does not mute the signal
for a short period of time. In this way, you can
continuously monitor the unstable signal.
1. Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/CH control to
access Menu No. 19B.
2. Press [+] or [-] to select OFF, 125 ms, 250 ms, or
500 ms.
3. Press [MENU] to store the settings and exit Menu
mode.
TIME-OUT TIMER
The Time-out Timer limits the time of each
transmission. It is also useful to prevent a long
accidental transmission.
1.Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/CH control to
access Menu No. 24.
2. Press [+] or H to select OFF, 3 minutes, 5 minutes,
10 minutes, 20 minutes, or 30 minutes.
3. Press [MENU] to store the settings and exit Menu
TNC
This transceiver has a built-in TNC that is usually
used for the Packet Cluster Tune {page 53} or
SkyCommand II+ operations {page 83}. However,
you can also utilize the built-in TNC as a high speed
(9600 bps) or normal (1200 bps) TNC that is
controlled by an external PC that is connected to
COM port on the rear panel {page 49}. Available
TNC command set is listed in the Appendix.
If you desire, you can connect an external TNC or
proprietary TNC/MCP to ACC2 connector. To
interface an external TNC/MCP with the TS-2000(X),
refer to the ACC2 connector information {page 95}
and accessing Menu No. 50B ~ 50F then configure
and adjust the Menu parameters to work with the
external TNC/MCP.
Note: You do not have to disable the built-in TNC to interface
with an
external TNC. Both the main transceiver and sub-receiver can
work
independently unless the transceiver is transmitting on the
same
band.
TRANSVERTER
If you have a transverter that converts the TS-2000
operating frequencies to other frequencies, you can
use this TS-2000 transceiver as a transverter exciter.
Consult the instruction manual that came with the
transverter for interfacing to the TS-2000.
1. Connect the transverter to the ANT 1, ANT 2,
ANT 144, ANT 430, or ANT 1.2G (TS-2000
optional) connector on the rear of the transceiver.
2. Select the exciter operating frequency on the main
transceiver of the TS-2000(X).
The transverter will use this frequency as the
reference for converting frequencies.
3. Access Menu No. 25, and select ON by pressing
[+].
The output power is automatically set to the
lowest power for that frequency. See TX
POWER (below).
4. Press [MENU] to store the setting and exit the
Menu mode.
5. Press [ENT], then set the target converting
frequency, using the numeric keys.
6. Press [ENT] to complete the entry.
7. The transceiver displays the target transverter
frequency instead of the actual operating frequency.
Note: When using a transverter, not all the functions of
this
transceiver are available.
TX MONITOR
TX monitor allows you to monitor the on-going
transmission sound. This is convenient when you
want to check the modulation sound quality of the
transmission. In FSK mode, you can monitor the FSK
signal that the TS-2000(X) is transmitting.
1. Press [FUNC], [PWR/TX MONI].
2. The current TX monitor setting appears.
3. Turn the MULTI/CH control to select the monitor
sound level from OFF, and 1 to 9.
4. Press [CLR] to store the selected T× monitor
level.
Note: We recommend you use headphones when you monitor SSB,
AM, or FM mode, in order to avoid howling.
The CW transmission signal cannot be monitored using the TX
monitor function. Use the CW sidetone function to monitor
CW
transmissions (Menu No. 13 and31).
TX POWER
You can adjust the transmission output power by
pressing [PWR/TX MONI] and turning MULTI/CH
control. If more precise power adjustment is
required, access Menu No. 23 and select ON. When
this menu is ON, the power adjustment steps change
as shown in the table below.
Band
Mode
Menu No. 23 OFF
Menu No. 23 ON
HF/50 MHz/144 MHz
SSB/CW/FM/FSK
5 ~ 100 W in steps of 5
5 ~ 100 W in steps of 1
AM
5 ~ 25 W in steps of 5
5 ~ 25 W in steps of 1
430 (440) MHz
SSB/CW/FM/FSK
5 ~ 50 W in steps of 5
5 ~ 50 W in steps of 1
AM
5 ~ 12.5 W in steps of 1
1.2 GHz
SSB/CW/FM/FSK
5 ~ 10 W in steps of 1
AM
1 ~ 2.5 W in steps of 1
Note:
The output power settings are stored independently for HE
50 MHz,
144 MHz, 430 (440) MHz and 1.2 GHz (TS-2000/ TS-B2000
optional). As shown in the table above, you can also store
different
output power settings for AM and other modes for each operating
band.
For AM mode in the430(440)MHz band and the 1.2GHz
(TS-2000/ TS-B2000 optional) band, the final step is 0.5 W,
rather than 1 W.
QUICK DATA TRANSFER
This transceiver has the capability to quickly and
conveniently transfer the receive frequency and mode
to another compatible transceiver. Compatible
transceivers include:
•TS-2000(X)
•TS-570S/570D
•TS-850S
•TS-870S
•TS-690S
•TS-950SDX
•TS-450S
Data Transfer could be useful while contesting. A
spotting station that is searching for new contest
multipliers can quickly transfer a frequency over to
the running (main) station.
SETTING UP
Equipment Needed
In addition to a compatible transceiver, the following
equipment is required:
Transfer to TS-2000(X), TS-570, or TS-870S:
One cross-wired cable. This cable must have a
9-pin RS-232C female connector at both ends.
Transfer to a transceiver other than TS-2000(X),
TS-570, and TS-870S:
KENWOOD IF-232C interface unit.
One cross-wired cable. This cable must have a
9-pin RS-232C female connector at one end and a
25-pin RS-232C female connector at the other
end.
One straight cable. This cable must have a
6-pin DIN male connector at both ends.
Connections
For diagrams on how to connect the two transceivers,
see "CONNECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT" {page 93}.
Note: If you are using a DSP- 100 unit with the transceiver,
turn on
the transceiver first, then turn on the DSP-IO0.
USING QUICK TRANSFER
When connecting with another TS-2000(X), TS-570,
or TS-870S, use the same COM connector baud rate
on each transceiver. If transferring to or from other
KENWOOD transceivers, select 4800 bps and 2 stop
bits. On the TS-2000(X), set the parameter in Menu
No. 56 to 4800 bps.
Note: While transferring data, other functions may work slower.
Transferring Data
The TS-2000(X) transceiver works as the Master,
sending data to the Slave transceiver.
1. Switch ON the Transfer function of each
transceiver.
On the TS-2000(X), access Menu No. 52 and
select ON. For the compatible transceiver,
refer to the instruction manual that came with
the transceiver.
2. On the Master, while in VFO mode, select an
operating frequency and mode.
3. On the Master, press QUICK MEMO [M.IN].
When using another TS-2000(X) as the Slave,
"PC" appears on the Slave.
The displayed data is stored in Quick memory
channel 0 on the Master and transferred to the
Slave.
Note: If the Master has RIT switched ON, the offset frequency
is
added to the receive frequency to be transferred.
Receiving Data
The TS-2000(X) transceiver works as the Slave,
receiving data from the Master transceiver. The
Slave can receive data using either Quick memory
channel 0 or the VFO.
1. Switch ON the Transfer function of each
transceiver.
On the TS-2000(X), access Menu No. 52 and
select ON. For the compatible transceiver,
refer to the instruction manual that came with
the transceiver.
2. On the Slave, access Menu No. 53 and select
either OFF (QUICK MEMO channel 0) or ON
(the VFO).
The default is OFF (QUICK MEMO).
3. On the Master, perform the appropriate operation
to send data.
For the correct method, refer to the instruction
manual that came with the transceiver.
Note: If you always use the TS-2OOO(X) for receiving only,
activate the
TX Inhibit function, accessing Menu No. 54 to avoid unintentional
transmission.
When the Slave receives data using the VFO programmed with
a
simplex frequency, the received data replaces the data on
both
VFOs. On the Slave, both RIT and XIT are set to OFF.
When the Slave receives data using the VFOs programmed with
split frequencies, the received data replaces the data only
on the
TX side of the VFO. On the Slave, XlT is set to OFF but RIT
is
not changed.
COMPUTER CONTROL
By connecting this transceiver to a computer, you can
change the computer into an electronic console from
which you can remotely control functions of the
transceiver. This capability makes remote operation
of your transceiver possible from across the room,
from another room, or when coupled with other
commercially available products and where lawful,
from another city, state, or country via a telephone
connection.
Note:
You can use the front panel controls while using computer
control. Settings done from the front panel are effective
immediately.
After the computer/s disconnected or turned off, all values
and
settings on the front panel are restored.
SETTING UP
Equipment Needed
A PC equipped with an RS-232C serial port.
One straight cable. This cable must have a 9-pin
D-Sub RS-232C female connector at one end, and
at the other end a 9-pin or a 25-pin D-Sub
RS-232C female connector that mates with the
RS-232C port of your computer.
Transceiver control application.
To design your programs, consult "APPENDIX" for
the
necessary information.
Connections
Connecting the transceiver to the computer is easy.
See the diagram given in "CONNECTING
PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT" {page 93}.
Note: Before connecting this transceiver to the computer,
switch
OFF the power to both the transceiver and the computer.
COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS
In order to control the transceiver by computer, you
must first choose the communication parameters.
1. On the computer, configure your transceiver
control application for 8 data bits, 1 stop bit and
no parity.
2. On the transceiver, select the same transfer rate
and number of stop bits via Menu No. 56.
The defaults are 9600 bps and 1 stop bit.
Note: To reliably use the 38400 or 57600 bps transfer rates,
the
RS-232C port of the computer must support these high-speed
communications parameters.
REMOTE MICROPHONE CONTROLLER
If you have a DTMF microphone, you can use the
microphone as a wired remote control unit as
described below.
1. Plug the DTMF microphone into the microphone
connector of the transceiver.
2. Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/CH control to
access Menu No. 45D.
3. Press [+] to select ON.
4Press [MENU] to store the setting and exit Menu
mode.
The DTMF keys function as follows:
DTMF key
Function
FUNC mode
1
Scan
-
2
Tone/CTCSS/DCS
Code Select
3
REV
SHIFT
4
MHz
-
5
MONI
Lock ON **
6
Voice 1
Lock OFF **
7
Volume* Up/Down
-
8
Band* Up/Down
-
9
Squelch* Up/Down
-
0
PWR* Up/Down
-
A
ENT
-
B
CTRL
Main/Sub
C
Repeater
-
D
FUNC
Func OFF
*
Down
Down
#
Up
Up
* Use the [#] (Up) and [*] (Down) keys to change the settings
of these functions.
* *The LOCK function is for the microphone keypad
Note: Microphone Remote does not function while transmitting.
You can use the D TMF Memory function {page 75} with the
Microphone Remote function.
The Repeater function is available for K-type models only.
Normally, pressing [2] cycles through Tone, CTCSS, DCS, and
OFE However, if 1750 Hz is selected for Tone, pressing [2]
will
only transmit the 1750 Hz tone. To return to Tone/ CTCSS/
DCS
mode, you must first deselect 1750 Hz for Tone.
Press [D] to enter FUNC mode, to use the 2nd function of the
DTMF keys. Pressing [D] while in FUNC mode will exit FUNC
mode.
[FUNC] on the transceiver works independently from the
Microphone Remote [FUNC] key.
WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROL
(K-type ONLY)
If you have a Kenwood TH-D7A handheld transceiver,
you can use it to remotely control the 144 MHz and
440 MHz bands of the TS-2000(X) transceiver, using
FM mode. You will be controlling one band on the
TS-2000(X) transceiver while sending DTMF tones to
the other band from the remote control transceiver.
This function is useful, for example, when you want to
control the VHF/UHF FM repeater function of the
TS-2000(X) transceiver from a location outside your
home or vehicle.
Note: To remotely control the TS-2OOO(X), you can also use
a handheld
transceiver which does not have a remote control function,
but a
DTMF function. You must, however, manually send DTMF tones
for control code strings. Skip steps 1 and 3 in "PREPARATION",
below. FCC rules perm# you to send control codes only on the
440 MHz
band.
PREPARATION
Assuming that the 144 MHz band of the TS-2000
transceiver will be controlled.
On the control transceiver:
1. Program a 3-digit secret number.
If you are using a TH-D7A, see "WIRELESS
REMOTE CONTROL" in its instruction manual.
2. Select the transmit frequency on the 440 MHz
band.
3. Enter the Remote Control mode.
On the TS-2O00 transceiver:
4. Access Menu 61C, and select the same secret
number that you selected in step 1.
5. Select the receive frequency on the 440 MHz
band of the sub-receiver.
Mate this frequency with the transmit frequency
on the control transceiver.
6. Select the 144 MHz band as the TX band or
Control band for the main transceiver.
7. To have the TS-2000(X) transceiver send a control
acknowledgment to the handheld, access Menu
61D and select "ON".
DTMF tones which represent the secret
number will be used as an acknowledgment.
8. Access Menu 61E and select "ON".
"LOCK A" appears when the TS-2000(X) enters
Remote Control mode.
CONTROL OPERATION
When in Remote Control mode, the DTMF keys of the
control transceiver will function as shown in the table
below. Each time you press the desired key, the
transceiver will automatically enter transmit mode and
send the corresponding command to the mobile.
Note: If you are using a transceiver without a remote control
function, manually send "AXXX#YA#" where "XXX"
is your 3-digit
secret number and "Y" is a single-digit control
command. If you do
not add "A#" on the end, you can skip sending "AXXX#"
next time;
however, the mobile may be accidentally controlled by other
stations.
1 DCS ON
2 TONE ON
3 CTCSS ON
4 DCS OFF
5 TONE OFF
6 CTCSS OFF
7 CALL
8 VFO
9 MR
0 LOW
A ENTER
B TONE SEL
C REPEATER ON
D REPEATER OFF
* DOWN
# UP
To change the transmit/receive frequency:
([VFO] > [ENTER] > [0] - [9] (enter the necessary
digits) , [ENTER]) or ([VFO] ,= [UP]/[DOWN])
To recall a memory channel:
([MR], > [ENTER], > [0] - [9] (enter the necessary
digits) > [ENTER]) or ([MR] > [UP]/[DOWN])
To change the tone (or CTCSS) frequency:
([TONE SEL] ,> [0] - [9] (enter 2 digits; ex. [0], [5])
> [TONE SEL])
Use Nos. 01 to 38 shown in the table on page 35.
First activate the Tone or CTCSS function. You
can select a separate tone frequency for the Tone
and CTCSS functions.
Note: While in Wireless Remote Control mode, you can perform
only
the following operations on the TS-2OOO(X) transceiver.
Transmit
Acknowledge ON/OFF
Secret Number Change
Partial/Full Reset
SKY COMMAND II + (K-type ONLY)
The Sky Command II+ allows you to remotely control
the TS-2000(X) transceiver from a separate location.
Since the TSo2000(X) transceiver has an independent
VHF and UHF sub-receiver in addition to the main
transceiver, the sub-receiver can work as a
"Transporter" without requiring another VHF/UHF
transceiver.
So, if you already have Kenwood's TH-D7A handheld
or TM-D700A mobile transceiver, you can immediately
start enjoying Sky Command I1+ features to remotely
control the HF/50 MHz band of your TS-2000(X).
Or, if you have a friend who has another TS-2000(X),
you can also use his/her TS-2000(X) as a
"Commander" (a remote unit) to control the HF/
50 MHz band of your TS-2000(X) at home, using VHF
and UHF bands.
You will use one transceiver as a remote control unit,
called a "Commander". The VHF/UHF sub-receiver
in the TS-2000(X) transceiver is called the
"Transporter". It will function as an interface
between
the Commander and the HF/50 MHz band of the
TS-2000(X) main transceiver.
This system allows you, for example, to watch for and
hunt DX while washing your car, or to operate the HF
transceiver while relaxing in your car, living room, or
patio, instead of actually operating inside your shack.
PREPARATION
Although you can use either a TM-D700A, a TH-D7A,
or another TS-2000(X) transceiver as a "Commander"
(an external remote control unit), the following
procedure shows how to set up your TS-2000 as a
"Transporter" at a base station and the TM-D700A
as
a "Commander".
TS-2000 (Transporter) Setup:
1. Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/CH control to
access Menu No. 62A.
2. Press [SUB] then enter your callsign (ex: WD6DJY)
as a "Commander" callsign, using [+]/[-] or the
MULTI/CH control. To move the cursor, press
[MAIN] or [SUB]. Press [M.IN] to store the
callsign to Menu No. 62A.
3. Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/CH control to
access Menu No. 62B.
4. Press [SUB] then enter your alias call sign
(ex: WD6DJY-1) as a "Transporter" callsign, using
[+]/[-] or the MULTI/CH control. To move the
cursor, press [MAIN] or [SUB]. Press [M.IN] to
store the callsign to Menu No. 62B.
Note: You can use alpha-numeric characters, A to Z, 0 to
9 and
"-". The callsign must be no more than 9 characters
long,
including "-". Also, the following callsign formats
cannot be
entered:
WD6DJYZ
If you use only letters and numbers for the callsign, the
maximum length is 6 characters.
WD6-DJY- 1
You cannot use more than 1 "-" within a callsign.
WD6DJY
You cannot use a "-" as the first callsign character.
WD6DJY-19
An SSID must be within the range of I to 15.
5. Access Menu No. 62C, then turn the MULTI/CH
control to select a CTCSS tone frequency for Sky
Commander II+ (default is 88.5 Hz).
6. Access Menu No. 62D and select the
communication speed for Sky Command I1+.
Select 1200 bps for TM-D700A (9600 bps can be
used only when you use another TS-2000(X) as a
"Commander").
7. Access Menu No. 46 and select SUB.
8. Select a 144 MHz band frequency in FM mode on
the main transceiver and 440 MHz band frequency
in FM mode for the sub-receiver for Sky Command
operation.
TM-D7OOA (Commander) Setup:
1. Access Menu 4-1 and 4-2 to enter the same
callsign that you entered for TS-2000(X).
2. Access Menu 4-3 to select the same CTCSS tone
frequency that you selected for TS-2000(X)
(Transporter).
Note: Refer to Chapter 17, Sky Command II, of the TM-D7OOA
instruction manual for details on how to enter the callsign
and CTCSS
tone frequency.
15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES
Starting Sky Command I1+ operation:
After you have completed the following setups, you
can start Sky Command I1+ operation. Without
programming these parameters, you cannot perform
Sky Command I1+ operation.
On the TS-2000 (Transporter):
1. Select the desired HF frequency that you want to
be controlled on the main transceiver.
2. Select an open VHF frequency in FM mode for the
main transceiver and another open UHF
frequency in FM mode for the sub-receiver.
3. Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/CH control to
access Menu No. 62E.
4. Select T-PORTER (Transporter).
5 Press [MENU] to enter the Transporter mode.
On the TM-D700A (Commander):
1. Select the same VHF and UHF frequencies that
you selected for the TS-2000 (Transporter).
2. Access Menu 4-4 to select COMMANDER.
"PRESS [0] KEY TO START COMMANDER!!"
appears.
3. Press [0] on the DTMF Mic of the TM-D700A to
start the Sky Command I1+ operation.
CONTROL OPERATION
After setting up both the TS-2000 (Transporter) and
the TM-D700A (Commander) for Sky Command I1+
operation, press Mic [0] on the Commander. While in
Sky Command mode, the Mic keys of the
Commander will function as described below.
Each time you press a key, the Commander will
automatically enter transmit mode and send the
corresponding control command to the Transporter.
To receive audio on an Press Mic [2].
To switch the HF transceiver off
Press Mic [1]
To change the frequency or memory channel on the HF transceiver
Press Mic [UP]/[DWN]
To transmit audio on an HF frequency
Press and hold Mic [PTT], then speak into the microphone
To receive audio on an HF frequency
Press Mic [2]
To monitor the UHF band on the Commander
Press the Mic PF key assigned to the Monitor function.
Mic Key and Function
1. Power OFF
2. HF frequency receive ON/OFF
3. Modulation mode switch
4. RIT ON/OFF
5. XIT ON/OFF
6. RIT offset or XlT offset clear
7. Split-frequency ON/OFF
8. Transfer from Memory to VFO
9. In VFO mode: VFO A/VFO B switch
In Memory Recall mode: no change
0 Current settings retrieve (from HF transceiver)
B VFO/Memory Recall mode switch
C XIT/RIT offset frequency increase
D XlT/RIT offset frequency decrease
*(1) In LSB, USB, or CW mode:
10 Hz/1 kHz switch
In FM or AM mode: 1 kHz/10 kHz switch
#(2) In VFO mode: frequency entry ON
In Memory Recall mode: channel number
entry ON
1. "FS" appears when you select 1 kHz step (LSB/USB/CW)
or 10 kHz
step (FM/AM).
2. After pressing Mic [#], press Mic [0] to [9] to enter a
frequency or
memory channel number.
When Mic [0] is pressed, the Commander shows the
current settings of the HF transceiver:
Note:
After pressing [MENU], you can access only Menu 4-4.
The Transporter will transmit its call sign in Morse code
every
10 minutes, using the 144 MHz band.
The APO timer will not operate on the transceiver while the
Transporter is ON.
You must set VHF frequency on the main transceiver and UHF
frequency on the sub-receiver. Otherwise, the Sky Command
I1+
may not operate properly.
When the TS-2OOO(X) exits the Sky Command I1+ operation, the
operating frequencies will be returned to their original frequencies
(the frequencies before entering the Sky Command II+
operation).
USING TH-D7A AS A COMMANDER
To use a TH-D7A transceiver as a "Commander" (an
external remote control unit), follow the steps below.
Basically, it is the same as using a TM-D700A as a
"Commander" (described on the previous page).
TS-2OOO(X) (Transporter) Setup:
1. Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/CH control to
access Menu No. 62A.
2. Enter your callsign (ex: WD6DJY) as a
"Commander" callsign, using [+]/[-] or the
MULTI/CH control. To move the cursor, press
[MAIN] or [SUB]. Press [M.IN] to store the
callsign to Menu No. 62A.
3. Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/CH control to
access Menu No. 62B.
4. Enter your alias callsign (ex: WD6DJY-1) as a
"Transporter" callsign, using [+]/[-] or the
MULTI/CH control. To move the cursor, press
[MAIN] or [SUB]. Press [M.IN] to store the
callsign to Menu No. 62B.
Note: You can use alpha-numeric characters, A to Z, 0 to
9 and
"-". The callsign must be no more than 9 characters
long
including "-". Also, the following callsign formats
cannot be
entered:
WD6DJYZ
If you use only letters and numbers for the callsign, the
maximum length is 6 characters.
WD6-DJY- 1
You cannot use more than 1 "-" within a callsign.
-WD6DJY
You cannot use a "-" as the first callsign character.
WD6DJY-19
An SSID must be within the range of I to 15.
5. Access Menu No. 62C, then turn the MULTI/CH
control to select a CTCSS tone frequency for Sky
Commander I1+ (default is 88.5 Hz).
6. Access Menu No. 62D and select the
communication speed for Sky Command I1+.
Select 1200 bps for TH-D7A (9600 bps can be
used only when you use another TS-2000 as a
"Commander").
7. Assign the TNC band to the sub-band by
accessing Menu No. 46 and select SUB.
8. Select a 144 MHz band frequency in FM mode on
the main transceiver and 440 MHz band frequency
in FM mode for the sub-receiver for Sky Command
operation.
TH-D7A (Commander) Setup:
1. Access Menu 4-1 to enter the same callsign that
you entered for the Commander (ex: WD6DJY).
2. Access Menu 4-2 to enter the same callsign that
you entered for the Transporter (ex: WD6DJY-1).
3. Access Menu 4-3 to select the same CTCSS tone
frequency that you selected for the TS-2000(X)
(Transporter).
4. Set the same frequencies that you selected for the
"Transporter" for the VHF and UHF bands.
Note: Refer to Chapter 19, Sky Command II, of the TH-D7A
instruction manual for details on how to enter the callsign
and CTCSS
tone frequency.
CONTROL OPERATION
First, switch the TS-2000 transceiver ON and select
T-PORTER (Transporter) from Menu 62E.
Then, access Menu 4-4 on the TH-D7A and select
"COMMANDER". "PUSH [0] KEY TO START
COMMANDER!!" appears.
Press [0] on the TH-D7A to start Sky Command
mode.
When in Sky Command mode, the keys of the TH-D7A
(Commander) will function as described below. Only
[LAMP], [MONI], and the VOL control functions will
not change.
Each time you press the desired key, the Commander
will automatically enter transmit mode and send the
corresponding control command to the TS-2000
(Transporter).
To switch the HF transceiver OFF
Press [POWER].
To transmit audio on a HF frequency
Press and hold the PTT switch, then speak into the microphone
To receive audio on an HF frequency
Press [RX].
To monitor the UHF band on the commander
Press and hold [MONI].
Key and Function
Tuning control – Frequency or memory channel number
change
UP/DWN – RIT offset or XIT offset change
A/B – In VFO mode: VFO A/ VFO B switch
In Memory Recall mode: no change
POWER* - Power ON/OFF
RX 1* - HF frequency receive ON/OFF
MODE* - Modulation mode switch
RIT * - RIT ON/OFF
XIT * - XIT ON/OFF
CLR* - RIT offset or XIT offset clear
SPLIT* - Split-frequency ON/OFF
M > V* - Transfer from Memory to VFO
FAST - In LSB, USB, or CW mode:
10 Hz/1 kHz switch
In FM or AM mode: 1 kHz/10 kHz switch
SYNC* - Current settings retrieve
(from HF transceiver)
ENT - In VFO mode: frequency entry ON
In Memory Recall mode: channel number
entry ON
M/V VFO/Memory Recall mode switch
After pressing [ENT], you can use these keys as numeric keys
to
enter a frequency or memory channel number.
When [0/SYNC] is pressed, the Commander shows
the current settings of the HF transceiver:
Note:
On the Transporter, only [LAMP], [MONI], and [MENU] will
function. Pressing any other key will simply cause the
Transporter to generate an error beep.
After pressing [MENU], you can access only Menu 4-4.
The Transporter will transmit its ca//sign in Morse code every
10 minutes, using the 144 MHz band.
The APO timer will not operate on the transceiver while the
Transporter is ON.
USING ANOTHER TS-2000 AS A COMMANDER
To use another TS-2000(X) transceiver as a
"Commander" (an external remote control unit), follow
the steps below. Basically, it is the same as using a
TM-D700A as a "Commander" (described on
pages 83 and 84).
TS-2000(X) (Transporter) Setup:
1. Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/CH control to
access Menu No. 62A.
2. Enter your callsign (ex: WD6DJY) as a
"Commander" callsign, using [+]/[-] or the
MULTI/CH control. To move the cursor, press
[MAIN] or [SUB]. Press [M.IN] to store the
callsign to Menu No. 62A.
3. Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/CH control to
access Menu No. 62B.
4. Enter your alias callsign (ex: WD6DJY-1) as a
"Transporter" callsign, using [+]/[-] or the
MULTI/CH control. To move the cursor, press
[MAIN] or [SUB]. Press [M.IN] to store the
callsign to Menu No. 62B.
Note: You can use alpha-numeric characters, A to Z, 0 to
9 and
"-". The callsign must be no more than 9 characters
long
including "-". Also, the following callsign formats
cannot be
entered:
WD6DJYZ
If you use only letters and numbers for the callsign, the
maximum length is 6 characters.
WD6-DJY- 1
You cannot use more than 1 "-" within a callsign.
-WD6DJY
You cannot use a "-" as the first callsign character.
WD6DJ Y- 19
An SSID must be within the range of I to 15.
Access Menu No. 62C, then turn the MULTI/CH
control to select a CTCSS tone frequency for Sky
Commander I1+ (default is 88.5 Hz).
Access Menu No. 62D and select the
communication speed for Sky Command I1+.
Select 1200 bps or 9600 bps.
Access Menu No. 46 and select SUB.
Select a 144 MHz band frequency in FM mode on
the main transceiver and 440 MHz band frequency
in FM mode for the sub-receiver for Sky Command
operation.
TS-2000 (Commander) Setup:
1. Access Menu No. 62A and 62B to enter the same
callsign that you entered for the TS-2000
(Transporter).
2. Access Menu No. 62C to select the same CTCSS
tone frequency that you selected for the TS-2000
(Transporter).
3. Access Menu No. 62D and select the same
communication speed that you selected for the
TS-2000 (Transporter).
4. Access Menu No. 46 and select SUB.
5. Set the same frequencies that you selected for the
"Transporter" for the main transceiver and sub-
receiver.
Starting Sky Command II+ operation:
1. On the Transporter, access Menu No. 62E.
2. Select T-PORTER (Transporter).
3. On the Commander, access Menu No. 62E.
4.Select COMMANDER (Commander).
5. Press [MAIN] on the Commander to start the
operation.
Control and Function
Main control – turn to control the operating frequency
MULTI/CH control – turn to control the operating frequency
rapidly
[MAIN] – Press to monitor the current receiving frequency
[SUB] – Press to re-syncronize all the current receiving
frequency
[+]/[-] – Press to move up or down the operating band
(HF/50 MHz amateur radio bands)
[VFO/M] – Press to toggle between VFO mode and Memory
Recall mode
[ENT] – Press to enter a desired frequency using the
numeric keypad or a memory channel number in Memory Recall
mode
[M>VFO] – Press to transfer the memory channel information
to VFO
[A/B] – Press to select VFO A or B
[SPLIT] – Press to toggle SPLIT operation ON and OFF
[LSB/USB] – Press to select VFO A or B
[CW/FSK] – Press to select CW. FSK cannot be selected
[AM/FM] – Press to select FM or AM
[RIT]/[XIT] – Press to activate the RIT and/or XIT function
[CLEAR] – press to clear the offset frequency for RIT
and/or XIT function
[PROC] – Press to switch the speech processor function
ON
[A.N.] – Press to toggle the Auto Notch function ON
and OFF
[N.R.] – Press to select Noise Reduction 1, Noise Reduction
2, or OFF
[FUNC], [AT] – Press to toggle between ANT 1 and ANT
2 for HF/50 MHz band
[FUNC], [7/NB/LEVEL] – Press to toggle the Noise Blanker
function ON or OFF
[FUNC], [POWER] – Switch the Transporter power OFF.
These keys and controls are available on the
Commander to control the Transporter.
Note: When the synchronize operation is incomplete, the main
display
of the Commander may disappear. In this case, press [SUB]
to
re-synchronize.
You cannot recall memory channels 100 to 299 using lENT]
and the numeric keys. To recall memory channels 100 299,
use [+] or [-].
You can recall only the memory channels that have HF/50 MHz
frequencies.
Do not use VHF/UHF frequencies that are suffering from the
harmonics of HF/ 50 MHz transmissions.
The frequency control operations, such as the MAIN control
and
RIT/ XIT control, are much slower than using direct controls,
because each control command (in steps of 10 Hz) is sent as
packet data.
When you change the frequency continuously, using the MAIN
control or the MULTI/ CN control, the last entry of the
Commander frequency is reflected on the HF/ 50 MHz
transceiver.
Since Sky Command I1+ requires 2 VHF/UHF frequencies,
check the operating frequencies carefully to avoid interference
with other parties.
When the transceiver exits the Sky Command I1+ operation,
the
internal TNC retains the data transfer speed in Menu No. 47.
If a
different data transfer speed is required for packet operation,
reconfigure it to the desired value.
USING A SEPARATE TRANSPORTER
If you have more than 2 TH-D7A and/or TM-D700A
transceivers, you can use one of the transceivers as
a "Transporter". This transceiver is connected to
the
TS-2000(X) via the RS-232C port, EXT SP jack, and
Mic connector of the base station and the other
TH-D7A or TM-D700A transceiver works as a
"Commander". With this configuration, you can turn
the TS-2000(X) ON and OFF using the
"Commander". Refer to the instruction manual of
the
TH-D7A or TM-D700A for interfacing the transceiver
to the TS-2000(X) transceiver.
TS-2000 + TH-D7A/TM-D7OOA (Transporter) Setup:
1. Configure the TH-D7A or TM-D700A as a
"Transporter" and connect all the necessary
cables to the TS-2000.
2. Select a frequency (HF/50 MHz band) on the
main transceiver of the TS-2000.
3. On the TS-2000 Press [MENU], then turn the
MULTI/CH control to access Menu No. 62E.
4. Select a "CLIENT".
5. Press [MENU] to complete.
6. Start the Transporter mode on the TH-D7A or
TM-D700A.
TH-D7A/TM-D7OOA (Commander) Setup:
Configure the TH-D7A or TM-D700A as a
"Commander". Refer to the SKY COMMAND II
chapter in the instruction manual to set up the
transceiver as a "Commander".
You can use a "Commander" as described on
pages 84 and 86.
REPEATER FUNCTION (K-type ONLY)
This transceiver is capable of receiving signals on
one band and retransmitting them on another band.
For example, a signal received on the sub-receiver is
retransmitted on the main transceiver. Similarly, a
signal received on the main transceiver can be
retransmitted on the sub-receiver's frequency.
You can use any available frequency on the main
transceiver or sub-receiver to receive and transmit.
However, you cannot retransmit the received signals
that are outside the available transmission
frequencies. Additionally, you must use a different
antenna for transmitting and receiving. For example,
if you receive a VHF signal on the sub-receiver, you
can retransmit it using UHF on the main transceiver.
You cannot retransmit the signal using VHF of the
main transceiver.
Note: For the repeater function to operate, the squelch levels
of the
main transceiver and sub-receiver must be adjusted so that
no
background noise can be heard.
LOCKED-BAND REPEATER
The transceiver always uses the same band to
receive, and retransmits the received signals on the
other band.
1. Select a desired receive frequency on the sub-
receiver.
2. Press [MAIN] and select a desired transmit
frequency on the main transceiver.
3. Adjust the squelch threshold level so that both
receivers mute.
4. Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/CH control to
access Menu No. 61A.
5. Select LOCKED, using [+].
"LOCK A" appears.
Note: You can also reverse the receive and transmit bands,
so that
you receive on the main transceiver and transmit on the sub-
receiver's frequency.
CROSS-BAND REPEATER
The cross-band repeater is unlike the lock-band
repeater in that both bands can be used to receive
signals. When a signal is received on one band, it is
retransmitted on the other band. To activate the
cross-band repeater, select CROSS in Menu No. 61A
in step 5.
Note: The Repeater function has its own Time-out Timer which
is set at
3 minutes. This value cannot be changed.
After activating the Repeater function, you cannot access
Menu
Nos. other than 61A and 61B.
HANG TIME FOR REPEATER FUNCTION
If necessary, you can cause this transceiver to remain
in the transmit mode for 500 ms after signals drop.
Access Menu No. 61B (Repeater TX Hold) and select
"ON".
DRU-3A DIGITAL RECORDING UNIT
(OPTIONAL)
The optional DRU-3A unit allows you to record a
voice message on up to 3 channels. After recording
a message via your transceiver microphone, you can
then send that message.
The maximum recording time for each channel is as
follows:
Channel 1 : Approx. 30 seconds
Channel 2: Approx. 15 seconds
Channel 3: Approx. 15 seconds
The DRU-3A is useful in many situations:
DX chasing or contest operation where repeated
calls are necessary for extended periods of time.
Checking interference complaints with other
equipment (lets you be in two places at one time).
Checking or adjusting your transmit signal or your
antenna(s) if it's not convenient to be sitting in
front of your microphone.
Helping a friend adjust his/her antenna or receive
when he/she needs repeated test transmissions.
For information on how to install the DRU-3A unit,
refer to "INSTALLING OPTIONS" {page 97}.
RECORDING MESSAGES
This section explains how to record a single
message.
1.Select SSB, FM, or AM.
Use the same mode for transmitting and
receiving.
2. If VOX is ON, press [VOX/LEVEL] to switch the
function OFF.
3. Press [FUNC], [1/CHI/REC] to record the
message for channel 1.
"II REC WAIT" and "AP1 -" appear.
To exit the Record Standby mode and quit
recording your message, press [CLR].
4. Press and hold [1/CHI/REC], then begin
speaking into your microphone.
Three channels are available for recording
messages. Press channel key [2/CH2/REC]
or [3/CH3/REC] in place of [1/CH1/REC], in
step 3, to record the message on a different
channel.
5. Release the key pressed in step 4 when you have
finished recording your message.
Also when the maximum recording time
passes, recording stops.
The content of the channel is overwritten with
the new message.
6. Repeat steps 3 to 5 to record a message on
another channel.
Note: Pressing (POWER) cancels recording in progress and
clears the memory channel
MESSAGE PLAYBACK
You can play back the message in channel 1, 2, or 3
to check or to send. It is also possible to make a
longer message, by consecutively playing back the
messages of more than one channel, linking them
together.
You can even repeatedly send a longer, linked
message by using the Repeat function. To switch this
function ON, access Menu No. 29A and select ON
(Default is OFF). Then, select the repeat interval
time in Menu No. 29B (Default is 10 seconds).
Note: Pressing (POWER) cancels playback in progress.
The settings in Menu No. 29A and No. 29B are shared with CW
Message Playback described in "CW MESSAGE MEMORY"
{page 43}.
Checking Messages
1. Select SSB, FM, or AM.
Use the same mode for transmitting and
receiving.
2. If VOX is ON, press [VOX/LEVEL] to switch
the function OFF.
3. Press [1/CHI/REC], [2/CH2/REC], or
[3/CH3/REC], depending on which channel
you want to check.
For example, ">PLAY BACK" and "AP 1- -"
appear while playing back the message in
channel 1.
To interrupt playback, press [CLR].
4. To play back another message in sequence,
press the corresponding key ([1/CHI/REC],
[2/CH2/REC], or [31 CH3/REC]) while the first
message is being played.
Up to three channels can be queued.
Sending Messages
1. Select SSB, FM, or AM.
Use the same mode for transmitting and
receiving.
2. Press [VOX/LEVEL] to switch VOX ON or OFF.
If you switched VOX ON, skip step 3.
3. Press [SEND], or press and hold Mic [PTT].
4. Press [1/CHI/REC], [2/CH2/REC], or
[3/CH3/REC], depending on which channel
you want to use.
For example, " PLAY BACK" and "AP 1- -"
appear while playing back the message in
channel 1.
To interrupt playback, press [Cl.R].
5. To play back another message in sequence,
press the corresponding key ([1/CHI/REC],
[2/CH2/REC], or [31 CH3/REC]) while the first
message is being played.
Up to 3 channels can be queued.
6. If you pressed [SEND] or Mic [PTT] in step 3,
press [SEND] again or release Mic [PTT].
Erasing a Recorded Message
1. Press [FUNC] then [1/CH1/REC] or
[2/CH2/REC] or [3/CH3/REC] to select the
message which you want to erase.
"II REC WAIT" and "APn -" appear, where
"n" represents the channel number.
2. To erase the recorded message, press and
hold the same key as in step 1 ([1/CHI/REC],
[21 CH2/REC], or [31 CH3/REC]), and press
[CLR] at the same time.
A beep sounds and the message is erased.
Changing Inter-message Interval Time
For repetitive message playback, you can change
the interval between each series of messages.
Use Menu No. 29B, and select the time in the
range of 0 to 60 seconds.
Changing Playback Volume
Turning the MAIN AF or SUB AF control does not
change the volume for playback. To change the
volume, access Menu No. 14 to select the
playback volume level from OFF and 1 to 9.
VS-3 VOICE SYNTHESIZER (OPTIONAL)
Install the optional VS-3 unit to use this function.
Each time you change the transceiver mode such
as VFO A/B or Memory Recall, the transceiver
automatically announces the new mode. In
addition, you can program the front panel [PF] key
so that pressing it makes the transceiver announce
the displayed information. If you have the optional
MC-47 microphone, you can program one of the
Mic [PF] keys for this function as well.
For an explanation on how to install the VS-3 unit,
refer to "INSTALLING OPTIONS" {page 97}.
The table below indicates what the transceiver
automatically announces when it changes the settings.
Key Pressed
Operation
Announcement
[A/B]
VFO A
VFO Frequency
VFO B
[+], [-]
Band change
[CALL]
Call channel
Call + frequency
[VFO/M]
VFO or Memory Recall
VFO + frequency or MR + Memory No. + frequency
[MENU]/[+], [-]
Menu No. selection
Menu + No. + Selected number/ parameter
[M.IN]
Memory Scroll
MR + Channel + Memory No. (3-digit) + Frequency
[ENT]
Frequency entry
Enter
MULTI/CH control
Menu No changes
Menu + No + Selected number/parameter
Memory channel No. changes
MR + Memory channel No. + frequency
Numeric key control
Entering numbers
Every number entered
During the frequency entry
Mega hertz
Note: The PF key assignment parameter is announced as the
number shown below.
63 Voice 1
64 Voice 2
65 RX MONI
66 DSP MONI
67 QUICK MR
68 QUICK M.IN
69 SPLIT
70 TF-SET
71 A/B
72 VFO/M
73 A=B
74 SCAN
75 M>VFO
76 M.IN
77 CW TUNE
78 CH1
79 CH2
80 CH3
81 FINE
82 CLR
83 CALL
84 CTRL
85 1MHz
86 ANT ½
87 NB
88 N.R.
89 B.C.
90 A.N.
99 OFF
For the [PF] key, the transceiver will announce
different information, depending on whether VOICE1
or VOICE2 is selected.
VOICE1:
VFO or memory channel frequencies are
announced beginning with the 10 MHz digit and
continuing through to the 10 Hz digit. If the
memory channel has no data stored, "open" is
announced. For the MHz decimal point, "point" is
announced. For the kHz decimal point, a short
pause (200 ms) is made. A 200 ms pause is also
made between the channel number and the
frequency.
Menu numbers and their settings are announced
with a short pause (200 ms) between the menu
number and the setting.
Note: If operating a key or a control changes the contents
of the
display while an announcement is in progress, the announcement
is
interrupted.
VOICE2:
The S-meter readings at the time you pressed the
key, are announced, for example, "S5" or "20
dB".
The table below shows the available announcements
when the [PF] (VOICE2) is pressed.
1. Assign VOICE1 or VOICE2 to the front panel [PF]
key by accessing Menu No. 51A. Or, if you are
using the optional MC-47 microphone, assign one
of the Mic [PF] keys to either VOICE1 or VOICE2.
For programming Mic [PF] keys, refer to
"PROGRAM FUNCTION KEYS" {page 77}.
2. Press the [PF] key that you programmed.
An announcement is made based on the
VOICE1 or VOICE2 selection.
To interrupt the announcement, press the [PF]
key again.
MICROPROCESSOR RESET
If your transceiver seems to be malfunctioning,
resetting the microprocessor default settings may
resolve the problem. There are 2 levels of resetting
the microprocessor of the TS-2000(X): partial reset
and full reset.
INITIAL SETTINGS
For each VFO, the factory defaults for the operating
frequency and mode are as follows:
•MAIN VFOA: 14.000.000 MHz/USB
•MAIN VFO B: 14.000.000 MHz/USB
•SUB VFO: 144.000.00 MHz/FM
The Memory channels and Quick Memory channels
have no data stored.
PARTIAL RESET
Perform a Partial Reset if a key or control does not
function according to the instructions in this manual.
The following data is NOT erased by performing a
Partial Reset.
• Memory channel data
• Menu settings
• Antenna tuner preset data
• ANT 1/ANT 2 data
Reset the transceiver by pressing [A/B]+[ power ].
A confirmation message appears. Press [A/B] to
proceed. Otherwise, press any other key to
cancel the Partial Reset and return to normal
operation.
"HELLO" appears on the display and the VFOs
resets to the factory default values.
FULL RESET
Perform a Full Reset if you want to erase all the data
in all the memory channels. In addition, this function
resets all the settings that you customized, to the
factory defaults (i.e.- menu settings, antenna tuner
preset data, etc.).
Reset the transceiver by pressing [A=B]+[power].
A confirmation message appears when performing
the Full Reset. Press [A=B] to proceed. Otherwise,
press any other key to cancel the Full Reset and
return to normal operation.
When you perform the full reset:
• "HELLO" appears on the display.
•All frequencies, modes, memory data and AT
preset data are set to the factory default values
(refer to "INITIAL SETTINGS", above).
CONNECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT
COMPUTER
The COM connector allows you to directly connect a computer
or dumb terminal by using an RS-232C cable
terminated with a 9-pin female connector.
No external hardware interface is required between your computer
and the transceiver. See "APPENDIX" for
information related to this connector.
COMPATIBLE TRANSCEIVER
When transferring data to or from another TS-2000(X), TS-570,
or TS-870S, directly connect the two transceivers
using the COM connectors.
When transferring data to other KENWOOD transceivers, use
the optional IF-232C interface unit. Connect the
IF-232C to the ACC 1 connector located on the compatible transceiver.
6-pin DIN plugs (E07-0654-XX) are
available as options. Contact your dealer or a KENWOOD Service
Center.
RTTY EQUIPMENT
Use the ACC 2 connector to connect to the RTTY equipment.
Connect the RTTY key output line to pin 2 of the
ACC 2 connector. Connect the demodulation input line of the
RTTY equipment to pin 3 of the ACC 2 connector
{page 95}.
Note: Do not share a single power supply between the transceiver
and the RTTY equipment. Keep as wide a separation as possible
between the
transceiver and the RTTY equipment to reduce noise-pickup
by the transceiver.
HF LINEAR AMPLIFIER
Connect an extern{I transmit power amplifier to the REMOTE
connector. Before using the external amplifier,
switch ON the linear amplifier control relay via Menu No.
28A.
The TX/RX relay response time is 10 ms when you have selected
CW Full Break-in and 25 ms when you have
selected CW Semi Break-in.
Note: The TX/RX control method differs, depending on external
amplifier models. Some amplifiers enter the TX mode when the
control terminal is
grounded. For those amplifiers, connect pin 2 of the REMOTE
connector to the GND terminal of the amplifier and connect
pin 4 of the connector to
the control terminal of the amplifier.
ANTENNA TUNER
Use the ANT 1 and AT connectors to connect an external antenna
tuner. If you connect the external tuner to the
ANT 2 connector, the external tuner will not function.
Note: While using an external antenna tuner with the TS-2OOO(X)/
TS-B2000, you cannot use the 6 m band to transmit. Connect
your 6 m band
antenna to the ANT 2 connector.
External antenna tuner
TS-2OOO(X)TS-B2000
The AT-300 external antenna tuner is a
discontinued model. It may no longer be
available in your area.
MCP AND TNC
Use the ACC 2 connector to connect the input/output lines
from a Terminal Node Controller (TNC) for Packet
operation, a Multimode Communications Processor (MCP) for
operation on Packet, PacTOR, AMTOR, G-TOR,
PSK31, or FAX, or from a Clover interface. Also use the ACC
2 connector to connect SSTV and phone patch
equipment.
Connect the TNC or MCP to the ACC 2 connector using a cable
equipped with a 13-pin DIN plug.
Connecting the TNC or MCP to a personal computer or dumb
terminal requires an RS-232C cable.
Note: Do not share a single power supply between the transceiver
and the TNC or MCP. Keep as wide a separation as possible
between the
transceiver and the computer to reduce noise-pickup by the
transceiver.
Pin #1; Pin name-SANO
Function: AF output from the sub-receiver
Connect to the TNC or MCP receive data pin for digital operation
AF output level is independent from SUB AF control setting.
AF output level can be changed by adjusting the Menu No. 50D
value.
Output impedence: approx. 10 k, omega.
Pin #2; Pin name-RTTY
Function: RTTY key input
Pin # 3; Pin name-Mano
Function: AF output from the main transceiver
Connect the to TNC or MCP receive data pin for digital operation.
AF output level is independent from the MAIN AF control setting.
AF output level can be changed by adjusting the Menu No. 50C
value.
Output impedance: Approx. 10 k, omega
Pin # 4; Pin name-GND
Function: Ground
Pin #5; Pin name-MSQ
Function: Main transceiver squelch control
Connect to the TNC or MCP squelch control pin for digital
operation.
Prevents the TNC from transmitting while the transceiver squelch
is open.
Squelch open: Low impedance.
Squelch closed: High impedance.
Pin #6; Pin name-NC
Function: No connection
Pin #7; Pin name-SSQ
Function: Sub-receiver squelch control
Connect to the TNC or MCP squelch control pin for digital
operation.
Prevents the TNC from transmitting while the transceiver squelch
is open.
Squelch open: low impedance.
Squelch closed: High impedance.
Pin #8; pin name-GND
Function: ground
Pin # 9; pin name-PKS
Function: Transceiver PTT line control.
Ground this terminal to transmit.
Connect to the TNC or MCP transmit/receive switching pin for
digital operation.
Microphone audio input mutes when the transceiver transmits.
Pin # 10; pin name-NC
Function: no connection
Pin #11; pin name-PKD
Function: Microphone audio input
Connect to the TNC or MCP transmit data pin for digital operation
Pin #12; pin name-GND
Function: ground
Pin #13; pin name-SS
Function: PTT control
Ground this terminal to transmit.
For connecting a footswitch or other external controller (in
parallel with MIC jack.)
Microphone audio input does NOT mute when the receiver transmits.
TYPICAL MCP/TNC SETUP
LINEAR AMPLIFIER (50 MHz, VHF, UHF and 1.2 GHz)
Connect an external 50 MHz/VHF/UHF/1.2 GHz power amplifier
control cable to the EXT.CONT connector. The TX/RX switching
time can be configured independently for each band, accessing
Menu No. 28B ~ 28E. Select 1
for 10 ms delay or 2 for 25 ms delay. However, when CW Full
Break-in is enabled, 10 ms switching delay is applied automatically
regardless of the settings. You can also disable the EXT.CONT
control, selecting OFF
(default).
Note: The TX/RX control method differs, depending on external
amplifier models. Most amplifiers enter the TX mode when the
control
terminal is grounded. For those amplifiers, connect the metal
cover of the EXT.CONT connector to the GND terminal of the
amplifier and
connect pin 2 (50 MHz), pin 6 (144 MHz), pin 1 (430 (440)
MHz), or pin 4 (1.2 GHz) of the connector to the control terminal
of the amplifier.
EXT.CONT connector
Pin #1; Pin name-43TXC
Function: Grounded when the transceiver
transmits on the 430/440 MHz
band. (DC 20V, 20 mA max.)
Pin #2; Pin name-50TXC
Function: Grounded when the transceiver
transmits on the 50 MHz band.
(DC 20V, 20 mA max.)
Pin #3; Pin name-ALC
Function: ALC input from amplifier (-7V).
Pin #4; Pin name-12TXC
Function: Grounded when the transceiver
transmits on the 1.2 GHz band.
(DC 20V, 20 mA max.)
Pin #5; Pin name-ALC
Function: ALC input from amplifier (-7V).
Pin #6; Pin name-14TXB
Function: Grounded when the transceiver
transmits on the 144 MHz band.
(DC 20V, 20 mA max.)
Pin # 7; Pin name-ALC
Function: ALC input from amplifier (-7V).
Pin #8; Pin name-ALC
Function: ALC input from amplifier (-7V).
Pin Metal Cover; Pin name-GND
Function: Ground
Installing options:
You will require a Phillips screwdriver when installing
the optional units.
REMOVING THE BOTTOM CASE
When installing the optional DRU-3A or VS-3 unit,
remove the bottom case first.
1. Remove the 10 screws.
2. Lift off the bottom case.
DRU-3A DIGITAL RECORDING UNIT
Caution: Switch off THE POWER AND UNPLUG THE DC POWER
RE BEGINNING INSTALLATION.
1. Remove the bottom case (10 screws).
2. Locate the DRU-3Aconnector.
3. Peel off the paper on the cushion attached to the
PC board of the transceiver.
4. Plug the DRU-3A into the DRU-3A connector of the PC board.
5. Press the top of the DRU-3A to affix it to the cushion.
6. Replace the bottom case (10 screws).
Note: After the installation, you can adjust the DRU-3A playback
volume by selecting Menu No. 14.
VS-3 VOICE SYNTHESIZER UNIT
Caution: Switch off THE POWER AND UNPLUG THE DC POWER
Cable before BEGINNING INSTALLATION.
1. Remove the bottom case (10 screws).
2. Locate the VS-3 jack.
3. Hold the VS-3 unit with the component side facing
up, and insert the VS-3 connector into the VS-3 jack.
4. Replace the bottom case (10 screws).
Note: After the installation, you can adjust the VS-3 playback
volume
by selecting Menu No. 15.
17 INSTALLING OPTIONS
MB-430 MOBILE BRACKET
When installing the MB-430, attach the supplied
plastic spacers (G11-2698-XX) to the metal plates
that come with the MB-430. This is necessary to
protect the TS-2000(X)/TS-B2000 from scratches.
Make sure the tab faces out
Once the bracket is installed onto the vehicle,
prepare the transceiver by loosely screwing in the
rear screws. Hook those screws onto the rear guide
rail of the mounting bracket then adjust the
transceiver to your desired angle before tightening
the screws. Insert and tighten the front screws to
secure the transceiver in place.
To remove the transceiver from the bracket, first
remove the front screws, then loosen the rear screws
slightly and pull the transceiver forward to unlatch it
from the bracket.
Warning: Do not install the transceiver so that it is vertically
on its side.
RC-2000 REMOTE PANEL
Plug the modular cable from the RC-2000 into the
PANEL connector on the TS-2000(X)/TS-B2000 rear
panel. Access Menu No. 58 - 60 to adjust the panel
configuration if necessary.
Troubleshooting:
GENERAL INFORMATION
Your transceiver has been factory aligned and tested
to specification before shipment. Under normal
circumstances, the transceiver will operate in
accordance with these operating instructions. All
adjustable trimmers, coils and resistors in the
transceiver were preset at the factory. They should
only be readjusted by a qualified technician who is
familiar with this transceiver and has the necessary
test equipment. Attempting service or alignment
without factory authorization can void the transceiver
warranty.
When operated properly, the transceiver will provide
years of service and enjoyment without requiring
further realignment. The information in this section
gives some general service procedures requiring little
or no test equipment.
SERVICE
If it is ever necessary to return the equipment to your
dealer or service center for repair, pack the
transceiver in its original box and packing material.
Include a full description of the problems
experienced. Include both your telephone number
and fax number (if available) along with your name
and address in case the service technician needs to
call for further explanation while investigating your
problem. Don't return accessory items unless you
feel they are directly related to the service problem.
You may return your transceiver for service to the
authorized KENWOOD dealer from whom you
purchased it or any authorized KENWOOD service
center. A copy of the service report will be returned
with the transceiver. Please do not send
subassemblies or printed circuit boards. Send the
complete transceiver.
Tag all returned items with your name and call sign
for identification. Please mention the model and
serial number of the transceiver in any
communication regarding the problem.
SERVICE NOTE
If you desire to correspond on a technical or
operational problem, please make your note short,
complete, and to the point. Help us help you by
providing the following:
1. Model and serial number of equipment.
2. Question or problem you are having.
3. Other equipment in your station pertaining to the problem.
4. Meter readings.
5.Other related information (Menu setup, mode,
frequency, key sequence to induce malfunction,
etc.).
Caution: Do not PACK THE EQUIPMENT IN CRUSHED
ERS FOR SHIPMENT! EXTENSIVE DAMAGE MAY
URING ROUGH HANDLING OR SHIPPING.
Note: Record the date of purchase, serial number and dealer
from
whom the transceiver was purchased.
For your own information, retain a written record of any
maintenance performed on the transceiver.
When claiming warranty service, please include a photocopy
of
the bill of sale, or other proof-of-purchase showing the date
of
sale.
CLEANING
The keys, controls and case of the transceiver are
likely to become soiled after extended use. Remove
the controls from the transceiver and clean them with
a neutral detergent and warm water. Use a neutral
detergent (no strong chemicals) and a damp cloth to
clean the case.
LITHIUM BATTERY
This transceiver uses an EEPROM to store memory
channel data, menu configurations and all necessary
operation parameters. So, you never have to worry
about replacing batteries to operate the transceiver.
However, the transceiver's built-in TNC requires a
lithium battery (CR-2032) to store the TNC data.
Battery lifetime varies, but under normal operating
conditions, it should last for approximately 5 years. If
you find that the TNC no longer stores the TNC
parameters, contact an authorized KENWOOD
service center for replacing the lithium battery.
18 TROUBLESHOOTING
The problems described in this table are commonly encountered
operational malfunctions. These types of
difficulties are usually caused by improper hook-up, accidental
incorrect control settings, or operator error due to
incomplete programming. These problems are usually not caused
by circuit failure. Please review this table, and
the appropriate section(s) of this instruction manual, before
assuming your transceiver is defective.
Note: P/acing a powered portable transceiver near this transceiver
may cause noise in the transceiver.
Problem: The transceiver will not power up after connecting
a 13.8 V DC power supply and pressing [ ].
Nothing appears on the display, and no receiver noise is heard.
Probable cause: 1. DC power supply is OFF.
Corrective action: 1. Switch on the DC power supply. Ref pg.
2
Probable cause #2. Faulty power cable.
Corrective action: Inspect the power cable. Confirm polarities
are correct.
Red: positive (+); Black: negative (-). Ref. Pg. 2
Probable cause #3. The power cable is not connected securely.
Corrective action: Confirm the connections to the DC power
supply are secure.
Probable cause #4. Power cable fuse is open.
Corrective action: Look for the cause of the blown fuse. After
inspecting and correcting any problems, install a new fuse
of the specified rating. Ref. Pg 2
Problem: After switching ON the power, the transceiver does
not function normally. For example,
no digits or incorrect digits appear on the display.
Probable cause #1: The input voltage is outside 13.8 V DC+-15%
(11.7 to 15.8 V DC).
Corrective action: Correct the input voltage or use a 12 to
16 V battery. Ref. Pg. 2
Probable cause #2: The microprocessor has malfunctioned.
Corrective action: Review “Microprocessor reset”
After understanding what data will be lost, do a Partial Reset.
If the problem, remains, do a full reset. Ref. Pg 92
Problem: After switching ON the transceiver, the internal
TNC resets to the
factory default values.
Probable cause: The internal TNC backup lithium battery voltage
is too low.
Corrective action: Have a new battery installed by your dealer
or at a Kenwood Service Center.
Ref. Pg. 99
Problem: The transceiver does not respond correctly after
pressing key combinations or turning
controls per instructions in this manual.
Probable cause #1: Procedures are not being followed precisely.
Corrective action: “Review Writing conventions followed”
Ref. Pg. i
Probable cause #2: The Frequency Lock function is on.
Corrective action: press [FUNC], [ATT/F LOCK] to switch the
function off. Ref. Pg. 77
Probable cause #3: the microprocessor and its memory need
resetting.
Corrective action: Review “Microprocessor reset.”
After understanding what data will be lost, do a Partial Reset.
If the problem remains, do a Full Reset.
Probable cause #4: The keys on the transceiver are unavailable
while operating the Tuning control.
Corrective action: Stop operating the Tuning control, then
press the appropriate keys.
Problem: The frequency cannot be changed.
Probable cause: The Frequency Lock function or Lock ALL function
is on.
Corrective action: Press [FUNC], [ATT/F LOCK] to switch the
function OFF. Ref pg. 77.
Or press [FUNC], [PRE/LOCK A] to switch the function OFF.
Ref. Pg. 77
Problem: SSB audio quality is very poor; the high or low audio
frequencies are absent.
Probable cause #1: The wrong operation mode is selected for
the receiver.
Corrective action: Select USB or LSB for the mode. Ref. Pg.
28.
Probable cause #2: The lo/width control or hi/shift control
is incorrect.
Corrective action: Turn the lo/width control counterclockwise
and the hi/shift control clockwise. Ref. Pg. 55.
Probable cause #3: Noise reduction 1 or 2 is on.
Corrective action #3: press [N.R./level] to switch the function
off. Ref. Pg. 56
Probable cause #4: Beat Cancel is ON.
Corrective action #4: Press [B.C./Manual] to switch the function
off. Ref. Pg. 56.
18 TROUBLESHOOTING
Problem: No signals are received or receive sensitivity seems
poor.
Probable cause #1: The SQL control is fully clockwise.
Corrective action: Turn the SQL control counterclockwise.
Ref. Pg. 19
Probable cause #2: The Attenuator function is ON.
Corrective action: press [ATT/F lock] to switch the function
off. Ref. Pg 57.
Probable cause #3: [Send] was pressed, and the transceiver
is now in transmit mode.
Corrective action: Press [Send] to return to receive mode.
Or release Mic [PTT].
Probable cause #4: The receive bandwidth was incorrectly
set.
Corrective action: Review “DSP Filters” and “Changing
the receive filter bandwidth”, and set the controls
accordingly. Ref. Pg. 55.
Probable cause #5: The wrong antenna connector (Ant 1 or
Ant 2) was selected.
Corrective action: Press [Func], [At/Ant1/2] to select the
other antenna connector. Ref. Pg. 72.
Probable cause #6: The receive preamplifier is off.
Corrective action: Press [Pre/lock A] to switch the function
on. Ref. Pg. 57.
Problem: No signals are received or receive sensitivity seems
poor; S-meter is reading full scale.
Probable cause: The RF control was set too low.
Corrective action: Turn the Main RF Gain control fully clockwise.
Ref. Pg. 18.
Problem: Received signals are totally unintelligible.
Probable cause: The wrong modulation mode was selected.
Corrective action: Press [LSB/USB/AUTO], [CW/FSK/REV], or
[FM/AM/NAR] to select the correct modulation mode. Ref pg.
19.
Problem: Memory Scan will not start scanning.
Probable cause #1: The SQL control was not set correctly.
Corrective action: Adjust the SQL controls to just eliminate
background noise. Ref pg. 19, 46.
Probable cause #2: Less than two memory channels were unlocked.
Corrective action: Unlock at least two memory channels. Ref.
Pg 68
Probable cause #3: Less than two memory channels were programmed
Corrective action: Store data in at least tow memory channels.
Ref pg. 68.
Probable cause #4: The SQL control was not set correctly.
Corrective action: Adjust the SQL controls. Ref pg. 19, 46.
Problem: Memory Scan will not scan one of the stored channels;
the desired channel is
NOT locked out.
Probable Cause: With Group Scan selected, the channel you
want to scan is in a different group.
Corrective Action: Select the group that contains the memory
channel you want to scan. Ref. Pg. 69
Problem: Program Scan will not start scanning.
Probable Cause: The start and end frequencies are identical
Corrective Action: Store different start and end frequencies.
Ref. Pg. 62
Problem: Tuning does not finish successfully.
Probable Cause: The impedance of the coaxial cable and antenna
was not matched. Tuning does not successfully finish depending
on conditions although the SWR meter indicates smaller than
3:1.
Corrective Action: Adjust the antenna system to lower the
SWR. Ref. Pg. 1
Problem: The internal tuner is bypassed immediately after
tuning is started.
Probable cause: The SWR of the antenna system is too high.
Corrective action: Adjust the antenna system to lower the
SWR. Ref. Pg. 1
Problem: You cannot transmit even though you press Mic [PTT]
or transmissions result
in no contacts.
Probable Cause #1: The microphone plug was not inserted completely
into the MIC connector.
Corrective Action: Turn OFF the power, ensure the MIC connector
has no foreign objects in it, then plug in the connector firmly.
Ref. Pg. 3
Probable Cause #2: The Transmit Inhibit function is ON.
Corrective Action: Change Menu No. 54 to OFF. Ref. Pg. 41
Probable Cause #3: CW or FSK was selected instead of a voice
mode.
Corrective Action: Press [LSB/USB/AUTO] or [FM/AM/NAR] to
select a voice mode. Ref. Pg. 19
Probable Cause #4: The DSP TX filter bandwidth was improperly
selected.
Corrective Action: Adjust the settings in Menu # 22. Ref pg.
41.
Probable Cause #5: The wrong antenna connector (ANT 1 or
ANT 2) was selected.
Corrective Action: press [FUNC], [ANT ½ ] to select
the other antenna connector. Ref. Pg. 72.
Problem: Attempting to transmit results in the "HELLO"
message appearing and the receive mode being
restored.
Probable cause #1: The antenna is not connected correctly.
Corrective Action: Check the antenna connection. Correct as
necessary. Ref pg. 72
Probable cause #2: The impedances of the antenna and transceiver
are not properly matched.
Corrective action: Reduce the SWR of the antenna system. Ref.
Pg. 1
Probable cause #3: the input voltage is outside 13.8 V DC
+-15% (11.7 to 15.8 V DC).
Corrective action: Correct the input voltage or use a 12 to
16V battery. Ref. Pg. 2
Probable cause #4: The current rating of the DC power supply
is not enough.
Corrective action: Use a DC power supply that has a current
rating of more thatn 20.5A at 13.8 DC. Ref. Pg. 2.
Problem: The transceiver has low transmit power.
Probable cause #1: The microphone gain is set too low.
Corrective action: When in SSB or AM mode, increase the microphone
gain. Ref. Pg. 20
Probable cause #2: Poor antenna system connections are causing
high SWR.
Corrective action: Check the antenna connections. Confirm
that the antenna tuner is reporting a low SWR. Ref. Pg. 72.
Problem: VOX does not operate.
Probable cause: The VOX is set too low.
Corrective action: Increase the VOX gain. Ref. Pg. 39.
Problem: HF Linear amplifier does not operate.
Probable cause #1: The linear amplifier control relay is
OFF.
Corrective action: Change Menu # 28A to ON. Ref. Pg. 76.
Probable cause #2: The REMOTE connector wiring is wrong or
faulty.
Corrective action: Inspect the REMOTE connector wiring and
correct as necessary. Ref. Pg. 94.
Problem: 50 MHz, 144 MHz, 430 (440) MHz or 1.2 GHz linear
amplifier does not operate.
Probable cause #1: The linear amplifier control is OFF.
Corrective action: Change Menu # 28B~28E to ON. Ref pg. 76.
Probable cause #2: The linear amplifier control cable is
connected to the REMOTE connector.
Corrective action: Connect the cable to the EXT.CONT connector.
Ref. Pg. 96.
Probable cause #3: The EXT.CONT connector wiring is wrong
or faulty.
Corrective action: Inspect the EXT.CONT connector wiring and
correct as necessary. Ref. Pg. 96.
Problem: You cannot access and use repeaters.
Probable cause #1: Many repeaters require a subtone or 1750
Hz tone to access.
Corrective action: Review “FM REPEATER OPERATION”
and select the correct frequency and type of subtone. Ref.
Pg. 32
Probable cause #2: Shift direction or shift frequency is
wrong.
Corrective action: You must transmit on the repeater’s
input frequency and receive on the repeater’s output
frequency. Refer to “FM repeater operation.” Ref.
Pg. 32.
Problem: Digital operation results in few or no connects
or contacts
with other stations.
Probable cause #1: Physical connections between the transceiver,
computer and TNC/MCP is incorrect, or software settings in
the TNC/MCP are wrong.
Corrective action: Re-check all connections using this manual,
your TNC/MCP manual, and your computer hardware manual as
references. Ref. Pg. 94, 95.
Probable cause #2: Different transmit and receive frequencies
are being used.
Corrective action: Confirm that the RIT and XIT functions
are switched OFF. Confirm that you are not operating split
frequency. Ref. Pg. 38, 40.
Probable cause #3: The levels between the transceiver and
TNC/MCP are incorrect.
Corrective action: Adjust TX and RX levels using Menu # 50B~50D,and
level controls on your TNC/MCP. Ref. Pg. 50
Probable cause #4: Your transmitted signal or the incoming
receive signal is too weak.
Corrective action: Reorient/relocate your antenna or increase
your antenna gain.
Probable cause #5: The TX delay time parameter in your TNC/MCP
was incorrectly set.
Corrective action: Set the TNC/MCP TX delay time tomore than
300 ms.
Problem: Attempts at controlling the transceiver with the
computer have failed.
Probable cause #1: problem with the cable that connects the
PC to the TS-2000 (X) TS-B2000.
Corrective action: Check the cable and cable connections.
Ref. Pg. 93.
Probable cause #2: Communication parameters set in your terminal
program do not match transceiver parameters.
Corrective action: Use the same parameters in the terminal
program and the transceiver.
Check the Men #56. ref. Pg. 811 the impedances of the antenna
and transceiver are not properly
matched.
Operation Notices: The TS-2000(X)/TS-B2000 has been designed
and
engineered to avoid possible hardware glitches.
However, you may notice the following symptoms
when you operate the transceiver. These symptoms
are not malfunctions.
TX SIGNAL HARMONICS
The TS-2000(X)/TS-B2000 has 2 independent
receivers. Thus, it can receive signals while you are
transmitting. Because of this, the harmonics or the
mixed heterodyne signal images of your transmission
signal can be monitored through the receiver. Even if
the TX Monitor function {page 79} is OFF, the
transmission signal may be monitored through the
speaker.
INTERNAL BEATS
On some spots of the transceiver bands, the S-meter
moves or you cannot receive any signals. This is
inevitable when you use superheterodyne receivers.
You may notice the signals on the following spots of
the bands.
On the main transceiver:
51.259 MHz, 430.151 MHz, 432.209 MHz,
436.799 MHz, 439.298 MHz, 442.440 MHz
(K-type only), 1247.999 MHz, and 1269.387 MHz.
When the sub-receiver frequency is 144.000 MHz:
146.663 MHz (K-type only) and 436.249 MHz.
When the sub-receiver frequency is 440.000 MHz:
437.333 MHz and 444.315 MHz (K-type only).
Note: When the sub-receiver frequency changes, the above beat
frequencies may be changed accordingly. In this case, turn
the
sub-receiver OFF to remove the internal spurious signals.
On the sub-receiver:
144.490 MHz, 144.945 MHz, 430.150 MHz,
436.210 MHz, 436.800 MHz, 442.020 MHz
(K-type only), 449.400 MHz (K-type only) and
429.050 MHz (K-type only).
VISUAL SCAN
When you have the same VHF band or UHF band
for both the main transceiver and the sub-receiver,
the Visual scan may indicate the signals on the
bar-graph display even if no signal is monitored on
the main transceiver. This error occurs due to the
internal spurious harmonics that are generated by
the sub-receiver. Refer to "INTERNAL BEATS",
above, for the frequencies.
SENSITIVITY (K-type only)
While the main transceiver is receiving on the VHF band
(142 - 152 MHz), the sensitivity of the main transceiver
slightly degrades when you select 118 ~ 136 MHz or
155 - 300 MHz for the sub-receiver.
AGC
When you turn the AGC function OFF {page 38}, the
receiving audio signals can be distorted. In this case,
decrease the RF GAIN, turn the pre-amplifier OFF, or
turn the attenuator ON. In general, the RF GAIN is
greatly reduced when the AGC is turned OFE
SUB-RECEIVER
When you turn the sub-receiver ON or OFF, a
popping noise may be monitored from the speaker.
Optional accessories:
DRU-3A Digital Recording Unit
HS-5 Deluxe Headphones
HS-6 Small Headphones
LF-30A Low-pass Filter
MA-5 Mobile 5-band Antenna
MB-430 Mobile Mounting Bracket
MC-43S Hand Microphone
MC-47 Multi-function Microphone
MC-52DM DTMF Microphone
MC-60A Deluxe Desktop Microphone
MC-80 Desktop Microphone
MC-85 Multi-function Desktop Microphone
MC-90 DSP-compatible Desktop Microphone
PG-2Z DC Cable
PS-53 Regulated DC Power Supply (22.5 A)
RC-2000 Remote Panel
SP-23 External Speaker
SP-50B Mobile Speaker
UT-20 1.2 GHz TX/RX unit Service center installation only.
Contact
an authorized dealer for details.
VS-3 Voice Synthesizer Unit
IF-232C Interface Unit
PC-IA Phone Patch Controller
ARCP-2000 Advanced Radio Control
Program
This option is supplied with the TS-B2000.
Specifications
General
TS-2000
TS-B2000
TS-2000X
Mode
J3E (LSB, USB)/A1A (CW)/A3E (AM)/F3E (FM)/F1D (FSK)/ F2D (F2D)
Number of memory channels
300
Antenna impedance
50 (with Antenna Tuner 16.7 ~ 150)
Supply Voltage
DC 13.8 V +/- 15%
Grounding method
Negative Ground
Current
Transmit (max.)
20.5 A or less
Receive (no signal)
2.6 A or less
Usable temperature range
-10 C ~ 50 (+14 F ~ 122 F)
Frequency stability (-10 C ~ 50 C)
Within +/- 0.5 PPM
Frequency accuracy (at room temperature)
Within +/- 0.5 PPM
Dimensions (W x H x D Projections included)
281 x 107 x 371 mm/ 11.06” x 4.21” x 14.61”
(TS-2000/TS-2000X)
281 X 107 X 344.5 mm/ 11.06” x 4.21” x 13.56”
(TS-B2000)
Weight
Approx 7.8 kg/ 17.2 lb (TS-2000)
Approx 7.5 kg/ 16.6 lb (TS-B2000)
Approx 8.2 kg/ 18.1 lb
Transmitter
TS-2000
TS-B2000
TS-2000X
Frequency Range
160 m band
1.8 – 2.0 MHz (K-type)
1.81 – 2.0 MHz (E-type)
1.83 – 1.85 MHz (E2-type)
1.8 – 2.0 MHz
80 m band
3.5 – 4.0 MHz (K-type)
3.5 – 3.8 MHz (All E-types)
3.5 – 4.0 MHz
40 m band
7.0 – 7.3 MHz (K-type)
7.0 – 7.1 MHz (All E-types
7.0 – 7.3 MHz
30 m band
10.1 – 10.15 MHz
20 m band
14.0 – 14.35 MHz
17 m band
18.068 – 18.168 MHz
15 m band
21.0 – 21.45 MHz
12 m band
24.89 – 24.99 MHz
10 m band
28.0 – 29.7 MHz
6 m band
50.0 – 54.0 MHz (K-type)
50.0 – 52.0 MHz (E-type)
50.0 – 50.2 MHz
(E2-type)
50.0 – 54.0 MHz
2 m band
144 – 148 MHz (K-type)
144 – 146 (All E-types)
144 – 148 MHz
70 cm band
430 – 450 MHz (K-type)
430 – 440 MHz (All E types
430 – 450 MHz
23 cm band
1240 – 1300 MHz (w/UT-20)
1240 – 1300 MHz
Transmitter
TS-2000
TS-B2000
TX-2000X
Output power
SSB/CW/FSK/FM
Max
100 W (160m – 2m band)/ 50 W (70 cm band)/10 W (23 cm
band)
Min
5 W (160 m – 2 m band)/ 5 W (70 cm band)/ 1 W (23 cm
band)
AM
Max
25 W (160m – 2m band)/12.5 W (70 cm band)/ 1 W (23 cm
band)
Min
5 W (160m – 2m band)/ 5 W (70 cm band)/ 1 W (23 cm band)
Modulation
SSB
Balanced
FM
Reactance
AM
Low level
Spurious emissions
160m – 10 m band
-50 dB or less
6 m – 70 cm band
-60 dB or less
23 cm band
-50 dB or less
Carrier suppression (SSB)
50 dB or more
Unwanted sideband suppression
50 dB or more
Maximum Frequency deviation (FM)
Wide
+/-5 kHz or less
Narrow
+/-2.5 kHz or less
XIT shift frequency range
+/-20.0 kHz
Microphone impedance
600
Receiver
TS-2000
TS-B2000
TS-2000X
Circuit type
Main transceiver
SSB/ CW/ AM/ FSK: Quadruple conv. Superheterodyne
FM: Triple conversion superheterodyne
Sub-receiver
FM/ AM: Double conversion superheterodyne
Frequency Range
Main transceiver
0.03 – 60.0 MHz (All types)
142 – 152 MHz (K-type)
144 – 146 MHz (All E-types)
420 – 450 MHz (K-type)
430 – 440 MHz (All E-types
1240 – 1300 MHz (All E-types)
0.03 – 60.0 MHz 142 – 152 MHz
420 – 450 MHz
1240 – 1300 MHz
Sub-receiver
118 – 174 MHz (All types)
144 – 146 MHz (All E-types)
220 – 512 MHz (K-type)
430 – 440 MHz (All E types)
118 – 174 MHz
220 – 512 MHz
Intermediate Frequency (IF)
Main transceiver
1st IF
0.03 – 60 MHz: 69.085 MHz or 75.925 MHz
118 – 512 MHz: 41.895 MHz
1240 – 1300 MHz: 135.495
2nd IF: 10.695 MHz
3rd IF: 455 kHz
4th IF: 12.0 kHz
Sub-receiver
1st IF: 58.525 MHz
2nd IF: 455 kHz
Receiver
TS-2000
TS-B2000
TS-2000X
Sensitivity
SSB/ CW/ FSK
(S/N 10 dB)
Main
0.5 – 1.705 MHz: 4 uV or less
1.705 – 24.5 MHz: 0.2 uV or less
24.5 – 30.0 MHz: 0.13 uV or less
50.0 – 54.0 MHz: 0.13 uV or less
144 – 146 MHz: 0.11 uV or less (All E-types)
144 – 148 MHz: 0.16 uV or less (K-type)
430 – 440 MHz: 0.11 uV or less (All E-types)
430 – 450 MHz: 0.11 uV or less (K-type)
1240 – 1300 MHz: 0.11 uV or less (All types)
AM (S/N 10 dB)
0.5 – 1.705 MHz: 31.6 uV or less
1.705 – 24.5 MHz: 2.0 uV or less
24.5 – 30.0 MHz: 1.3 uV or less
50.0 – 54.0 MHz: 1.3 uV or less
144 – 146 MHz: 1.0 uV or less (All E-types)
144 – 148 MHz: 1.4 uV or less (K-type)
430 – 440 MHz: 1.0 uV or less (All E-types)
430 – 450 MHz: 1.0 uV or less (K-type)
1240 – 1300 MHz: 1.0 uV or less (All types)
FM (12dB SINAD)
28.0 – 30.0 MHz: 0.22 uV or less
50.0 – 54.0 MHz: 0.22 uV or less
144 – 146 MHz: 0.18 uV or less (All E-types)
144 – 148 MHz: 0.25 uV or less (K-type)
430 – 440 MHz: 0.18 uV or less (All E-types)
430 – 450 MHz: 0.18 uV or less (K-type)
1240 – 1300 MHz: 0.18 uV or less (All types)
AM (S/N 10 dB)
Sub
144 – 146 MHz: 1.55 uV or less (All E-types)
144-148 MHz: 2.25 uV or less (K-types)
430 – 440 MHz: 1.55 uV or less (All E types)
438 – 450 MHz: 1.55 uV or less (K-type)
FM (12 dB SINAD)
144 – 146 MHz: 0.28 uV or less (All E-types)
144-148 MHz: 0.40 uV or less (K-types)
430 – 440 MHz: 0.28 uV or less (All E types)
438 – 450 MHz: 0.28 uV or less (K-type)
Selectivity
SSB
(Low-cut: 300 Hz/ Hi-cut: 2600 Hz
Main
-6 dB: 2.2 kHz, -60 dB: 4.4kHz
AM
(Low-cut: 100 Hz/ Hi-cut: 3000 Hz)
-6 dB: 6.0 kHz, -50 dB: 12.0 kHz
FM
-6 dB: 12.0 kHz, -50 dB: 25.0 kHz
AM
Sub
-6 dB: 12.0 kHz, -50 dB: 25.0 kHz
FM
-6 dB: 12.0 kHz, -50 dB: 25.0 kHz
Image rejection
Main transceiver
70 dB or more
Sub-receiver
60 dB or more
1st IF rejection
Main transceiver
70 dB or more
Sub-receiver
60 dB or more
Notch filter attenuation (at 1 kHz)
30 dB or more
Beat cancel attenuation (at 1 kHz)
40 dB or more
RIT shift frequency range
+/- 20.0 kHz
Squelch sensitivity
SSB/ CW/ FSK /AM
Main
0.5 – 1.705 MHz: 18.0 uV or less
1.8 – 28.7 MHz: 18.0 uV or less
50.0 – 54.0 MHz: 1.1 uV or less
144 – 146 MHz: 1.1 uV or less (All E-types)
144 – 148 MHz: 1.1 uV or less
430 – 440 MHz: 1.1 uV or less
430 – 450 MHz: 1.1 uV or less
1240 – 1300 MHz: 1.1 uV or less (All types)
FM
28.0 – 30.0 MHz: 0.2 uV or less
50.0 – 54.0 MHz: 0.2 uV or less
144 – 146 MHz: 0.1 uV or less (All E-types)
144 – 148 MHz: 0.16 uV or less (K-type)
430 – 440 MHz: 0.1 uV or less (All E-types)
430 – 450 MHz: 0.1 uV or less (K-type)
1240 – 1300 MHz: 0.1 uV or less (All types)
AM
Sub
144 – 146 MHz: 1.1 uV or less (All E-types)
144 – 148 MHz: 1.1 uV or less (K-types)
430 – 440 MHz: 1.1 uV or less (All E-types)
438 – 450 MHz: 1.1 uV or less (K-types)
FM
144 – 146 MHz: 0.18 uV or less (All E-types)
144 – 148 MHz: 0.23 uV or less (K-type)
430 – 440 MHz: 0.18 uV or less (All E-types)
438 – 450 MHz: 0.18 uV or less (K-type)
Audio output (8, 10% distortion)
1.5 W or more
Audio output impedance (EXT.SP1 and EXT.SP2)
8
APPENDIX
BUILT-IN TNC COMMAND LIST
Although the built-in TNC supports the following commands,
the TNC does not support the digipeater functions
due to the limited RAM capacity
Command Name
Short
Default
Parameter
Description
AUTOLF
AU
ON
ON/OFF
When ON, sends a line feed (LF) to the computer after each
carriage return (CR).
AWLEN
AW
8
7/8
Sets the length of bits between TNC and its host.
BEACON
B
EVERY 0
EVERY/AFTER n (n = 0 – 250)
If set to EVERY, sends a beacon packet at intervals of the
specified period (n). If set to AFTER, sends a beacon packed
only once
BTEXT
BT
-
0 – 159 characters
Specifies the content of the data portion of a beacon packet.
CALIBRAT
CAL
-
-
Sends a space/mark square wave (50/50 ratio). Enter Q to exit
Calibrate mode and restore the Command mode.
CHECK
CH
30
0 - 250
Specifies the interval from signal drop-out until execution
of disconnection. The unit of the parameter is 10 seconds.
CONNECT
C
-
Call (VIA, call2, call3, …call9)
Sends a connect request. Call1 is the call sign of the station
to be connected to. Call 2 to call9 are call signs of stations
to be digipeated through.
CONVERSE
CONV or K
-
-
Causes the TNC to enter Converse mode. Press [Ctrl]+[C] to
restore the Command mode.
CPACTIME
CP
OFF
ON/OFF
When ON and in Converse mode, sends a packet at intervals
of the period determined by PACTIME.
CR
CR
ON
ON/OFF
When ON, appends a carriage return (CR) to all packets to
be sent.
DISCONNE
D
-
-
Sends a disconnect request.
DISPLAY
DISP
-
-
Causes the TNC to display the current status of all the commands.
You can also specify a class identifier A, C, H, I, L, M,
or T to display the status of only the desired command class.
Enter a space between the command name and a class identifier;
ex. DISPLAY H.
A (ASYNC): RS-232C port parameters
C (CHAR): Special TNC characters
H (HEALTH): Counter parameters
I (ID): ID parameters
L (LINK): TNC-to-TNC link status
M (MONITOR): Monitor parameters
T (TIMING): Timing parameters
DWAIT
DW
30
0 – 250
Specifies the interval from no carrier detection until execution
of transmission. The until of the parameter is 10 milliseconds.
ECHO
E
ON
ON/OFF
When ON, causes the TNC to echo received characters to the
computer.
FIRMRNR
FIR
OFF
ON/OFF
The other station sends a notice (packet) to you if it is
not ready to receive data.
FLOW
F
ON
ON/OFF
When ON, starting key entry causes the computer to stop displaying
received packets.
FRACK
FR
3
0 - 250
Specifies the interval from one transmission until retry of
transmission. The unit of the parameter is 1 second.
HBAUD
HB
1200
1200/9600
Selects 1200 or 9600 bps as the transfer rate between packet
stations.
KISS
KISS
OFF
ON/OFF
Set the parameter ON, then switch the transceiver OFF. Turn
the transceiver ON again to enter KISS mode. When the transceiver
enters KISS mode, the “STA” and “CON”
LEDs blink alternatively a few times. To exit KISS mode, send
the binary data C0 FF C0 to the TNC or turn the transceiver
OFF. The next time you turn the transceiver ON, the TNC sets
the parameter OFF automatically.
MCOM
MCOM
OFF
ON/OFF
When ON, causes the TNC to also monitor control packets.
When OFF, causes it to monitor only information packets.
MCON
MC
OFF
ON/OFF
When ON, causes the TNC to monitor other stations while in
connection with the target station.
MONITOR
M
ON
ON/OFF
When ON, causes the TNC to monitor packages.
MRPT
MR
ON
ON/OFF
When ON, causes the TNC to display the entire digipeat list
for monitored packets
MYCALL
MY
NOCALL
6 characters + SSID
Specifies your call sign
PACLEN
P
128
0 – 255
Specifies the maximum length of the data portion of a packet.
PACTIME
PACT
AFTER 10
EVERY/AFTER n (n=0 – 250)
If set to EVERY, sends a packet at intervals of the specified
period (n). If set to AFTER, sends a packet only once after
the specified period (n). The unit of n is 100 milliseconds.
PERSIST
PE
128
0 – 255
Specifies a parameter to calculate probability for the PERSIST/SLOTTIME
method.
PPERSIST
PP
ON
ON/OFF
Causes the TNC to use the PERSIST/SLOTTIME method when ON,
or the DWAIT method when OFF.
RESET
RESET
-
-
Restores the default status for all the commands.
RESPTIME
RES
5
0 – 250
Specifies the acknowledgement packet transmission delay. The
unit of the parameter is 100 milliseconds.
RESTART
RESTART
-
-
Causes the TNC to function as if it is switched OFF then ON.
RETRY
RE
10
0 – 15
Specifies the number of transmission retries. If packets are
not correctly accepted while in connection, a connect request
is sent again after the specified number of retries.
SENDPAC
SE
$0D
0 - $7F
Specifies a character which forces a packet to be sent.
SLOTTIME
SL
3
0 – 250
Specifies the period of random number generation intervals
for the PERSIST/SLOTTIME method. The unit of the parameter
is 10 milliseconds.
TRACE
TRAC
OFF
ON/OFF
When ON, causes the TNC to display all received packets in
their entry.
TRIES
TRI
0
0 – 15
Specifies the number of transmission retries programmed in
the retry counter.
TXDELAY
TX
50
0 – 120
Specifies the time delay between PTT ON and the start of transmission.
The unit of the parameter is 10 milliseconds.
UNPROTO
U
CQ
Call1 (VIA call2, call3, …call9)
Specifies call signs to send a packed in Unprotocol mode.
Call1 is the call sign of the destination. Call2 to call9
are call signs of the stations to be digipeated through.
XFLOW
X
ON
ON/OFF
Causes the TNC to perform software flow control when ON, or
hardware flow when OFF.
Note:
If you are using a PC with a communication program to control
this built-in TNC, prepare the RS-232C cable (straight) for
connecting to the COM
terminal on the transceiver. Then, set the same communication
speed by accessing Menu No. 56. Select the same communication
speed and the
communications parameters. They must be set 8-bit, 1-stop
bit, Non-pari except for 4800 bps. The 4800 bps is also used
for the Quick Data
Transfer function {page 80} and the communication parameters
are fixed as 8-bit, 2-stop bit, Non-parity format.
COM CONNECTOR
HARDWARE DESCRIPTION
This transceiver uses a full-duplex, asynchronous,
serial interface for communicating through the male
9-PIN RS-232C COM connector. Each data is
constructed with 1 start bit, 8 data bits, and 1 stop bit
(4800 bps must be configured as 2 stop bits). No
parity is used. The pinout and the pin functions of the
COM connector are shown below:
Com Pin #
Com Pin Name (ref.: computer
Function (ref.: transceiver
I/O
1
NC
----
----
2
RXD
Transmit data
Output
3
TXD
Receive data
Input
4
NC
--
--
5
GND
Signal ground
6
NC
--
--
7
RTS
Receive enable
Input
8
CTS
Transmit enable
Output
9
NC
--
--
RXD: Transmit data is serial data transferred from
the transceiver to the computer.
TXD." Receive data is serial data transferred from
the computer to the transceiver.
GND: Signal ground pin
RTS: This signal is applied to the transceiver. It is
used to inhibit transmit data from the transceiver
when the computer is not ready to receive data.
Transmit data is inhibited when the level is low.
CTS: This signal is applied from the transceiver. It
is used to inhibit transmit data from the computer
when the transceiver is not ready to receive data.
Transmit data is stopped when the level is low.
CONTROL OPERATION
Most computers handle data in the form of "bits"
and
"bytes". A bit is the smallest piece of information
that
a computer can handle. A byte is composed of eight
bits. This is the most convenient form for most
computer data. This data may be sent in the form of
either serial or parallel data strings. The parallel
method is faster but more complicated, while the
serial method is slower and requires less complicated
equipment. The serial form is, therefore, a less
expensive alternative.
Serial data transmission uses time-division methods
over a single line. Using a single line also offers the
advantage of reducing the number of errors due to
line noise.
Only 3 lines are required theoretically for control of
the transceiver via the computer:
Transmit data
Receive data
Ground
From a practical standpoint, it is also necessary to
incorporate some means of controlling when this data
transfer will occur. The computer and transceiver
cannot be allowed to send data at the same time!
The required control is achieved by using the RTS
and CTS lines.
For example, the transceiver is placed into the
transmit mode whenever the character string "TX;"
is
sent from the computer. The character string "TX;"
is
called a computer control command. It tells the
transceiver what to do. There are numerous
commands available for control of the transceiver.
These commands may be incorporated into a
computer program written in any high level language.
Programming methods vary from computer to
computer; therefore, refer to the instruction manuals
provided with the terminal program and computer.
COMPUTER CONTROL COMMANDS
A computer control command is composed of an
alphabetical command, various parameters, and the
terminator that signals the end of the control
command.
EXAMPLE: Command to set VFO A to 7 MHz
Commands can be classified as shown below:
Computer control commands>Input command (input to the transceiver)>set
commands (sets a particular condition) & Read command
(reads an answer)
Computer control commands>output command (from the transceiver)>answer
command (transmits a condition)
For example, note the following in the case of the FA
command (Frequency of VFO A):
To set the frequency to 7 MHz, the following
command is sent from the computer to the
transceiver:
"FA00007000000;"
(Set command)
To read the frequency of VFO A, the following
command is sent from the computer to the
transceiver:
"FA;"
(Read command)
When the Read command above has been sent,
the following command is returned to the
computer:
"FA00007000000;"
(Answer command)
Note:
Do not use the control characters O0 to 1Fh since they are
either
ignored or cause a "?" answer.
Program execution may be delayed while turning the Tuning
control rapidly.
Receive data is not processed if the frequency is entered
from
the keypad.
Alphabetical Commands
A command consists of 2 alphabetical characters.
YoU may use either lower or upper case
characters. The commands available for this
transceiver are listed in the PC Control Command
Tables {page 115}.
Parameters
Parameters are used to specify information
necessary to implement the desired command.
The parameters to be used for each command are
predetermined. The number of digits assigned to
each parameter is also predetermined. Refer to
the Parameter Table {page 73} and the Computer
Control Command Tables {page 75} to configure
the appropriate parameters.
When configuring parameters, be careful not to
make the following mistakes.
(correct parameter: "1S+1000")
IS1000: Not enough parameters specified
(No direction given for the IF shift)
IS+100: Not enough digits (Only three frequency digits given)
IS u + u 1000: Unnecessary characters between parameters
IS+10000: Too many digits (Five frequency digits given)
Note: If a particular parameter is not applicable to this
transceiver, the parameter digits should be filled using any
character except the ASCII control codes (00 to 1Fh) and the
terminator (;).
Terminator
To signal the end of a command, it is necessary to
use a semicolon (;). The digit where this special
character must appear differs depending on the
command used.
Error Messages In addition to the Answer command, the
transceiver can send the following error messages.
Error message Reason for error:
Command syntax was incorrect. Command was not executed due
to
the current status of the transceiver (even though the command
syntax
was correct).
Note: Occasionally this message may not appear due to microprocessor
transients in the
transceiver.
Error message E: Reason for error:
A communication error occurred such as an overrun or framing
error during a serial data transmission.
Error message O: Reason for error: Receive data was sent
but processing was not completed.
Disclaimer: The information on this site is provided as
a public service to the blind and visually handicapped community. While we have
done our best to ensure the information provided is accurate, please realize
the use of any information on this site is solely at your discretion and we
take no responsibility for use or attempted use of this information. |
